Table of Contents
General 1
Introduction – MOBY E 2
Configuration and Mounting
Guidelines 3
Mobile Data Memories 4
Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5
Interfaces 6
Accessories 7
Documentation A
Error Messages B
ASCII Table C
Compatibility D
Published in April 2005
6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2
Configuration,
Installation and Service
Manual
MOBY E
ii
MOBY E
(4) J31069 D0105 U001 A0 7618
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or
to a particular part of the documentation.
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified
persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
MOBY, SIMATIC and SINEC are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the own-
er’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be pre-
cluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the
data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor-
rections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improve-
ment are welcomed.
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2
Siemens AG 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2005
Technical data subject to change.
Safety Guidelines
Qualified Personnel
Correct Usage
Trademarks
i
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Contents
1 General 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Introduction to MOBY E 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Basic Requirements 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Transmission Window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Sample Calculation 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Installation Guidelines 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 EMC Guidelines 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Foreword 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 General 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Spreading of Interference 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Cabinet Layout 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5 Avoiding Interference Sources 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.6 Equipotential Bonding 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.8 Shielding the Cables 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.9 Basic Rules on EMC 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Cable and Connector Assignments 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Cable Configuration 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Connector Assignment 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Connecting Cables 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Cable Lengths 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Mobile Data Memories 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 MDS E600 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 MDS E611 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 MDS E623 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 MDS E624 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5 Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 SLG 72 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 SLG 75 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 SLA 71 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Interfaces 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ASM 400 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Overview 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Hardware Description 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 ASM 410 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 ASM 450/452 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 ASM 454/424 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 ASM 456 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Description 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address 6-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3 Wiring ASM 456 6-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4 Diagnosis using LEDs 6-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5 Technical data 6-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.6 Dimensional drawings 6-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.7 Ordering data 6-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 ASM 470/475 6-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 ASM 473 6-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 ASM 724/754 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 SIM Serial Interface Module 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.1 Overview 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.2 Cable and Connector Allocation 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.3 Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure 6-98. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.4 SIM 70 ANT 0 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.5 SIM 70 ANT 1 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.6 SIM 72 6-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Accessories 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 MOBY Software 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Wide-Range Connector Power Pack 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Acquisition Station ES 030-K 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
iii
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
A Documentation A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Error Messages B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 General Errors B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 ASM-specific error B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C ASCII Table C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Compatibility D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
iv MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Figures
2-1 Overview of MOBY E components 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Transmission window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Direction of movement of the MDS 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Working in static operation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Working in dynamic operation 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-15.
3-11 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-16. .
3-12 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-16.
3-13 SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-17. . . . . . . .
3-14 SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-17. . . . . . . .
3-15 SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) 3-18. . . . . . . .
3-16 Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Flush mounting: MDS E600/E611 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Metal-free space for MDS E623 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Mounting on metal: MDS E624 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Flush mounting in metal (static): MDS E624 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Flush mounting in metal (static): ANT 18 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 1 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 4 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25 Mounting on metal: SLG 72 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 72 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30 MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E 611) 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31 The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611) 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32 Interfering metal supports 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33 Flush mounting 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34 Spreading of Interference 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35 The four kinds of interference coupling 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36 Shielding via housing 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38 Filtering the supply voltage 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39 Inductive interference 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40 Equipotential bonding 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41 Circuit diagram of the principle of ground fault monitoring 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42 SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43 Shielding of the cables 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-44 Connection of the shield rail 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-45 Interruption of shielded cables 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46 Simple layout with ASM 400 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield contact element 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48 Baring of the cable shield 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49 Voltage supply with power pack 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50 SLG with extra power pack 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
v
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3-51 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52 Drawing of mounting the SLG connector 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53 Connecting cable ASM 400/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54 Connecting cable ASM 410 ↔ SLG 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56 Connecting cable ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424/724 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58 Connecting cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59 Extension cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60 Connecting cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61 Extension cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62 Connecting cable for RS 232 PC ↔ SIM 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 MDS E600 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 MDS E600 and its mounting bracket 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Metal-free space for MDS E600 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 MDS E611 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Dimensions of MDS E611 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611
(for use with the MDS E600, see note in Figure 4-2) 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Metal-free space for MDS E611 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 MDS E623 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Metal-free space for MDS E623 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Dimensions and installation space for MDS E623 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft 4-16. . . . .
4-13 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 MDS E624 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Dimensions of MDS E624 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 Metal-free space for MDS E624 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Read/write device SLG 72 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 72 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Metal-free space of SLG 72 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Distance D: SLG 72 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Dimensioned drawing SLG 72 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Read/write device SLG 75 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 ANT 1 for SLG 75 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 ANT 4 for SLG 75 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 ANT 12 for the SLG 75 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 ANT 18 for the SLG 75 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 ANT 30 for the SLG 75 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Transmission window of the ANT 1 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Transmission window of the ANT 4 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Transmission window of the ANT 12 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Transmission window of the ANT 18 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Transmission window of the ANT 30 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Metal-free space for the ANT 1 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Metal-free space for the ANT 4 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Metal-free space for the ANT 12 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Metal-free space for the ANT 18 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Metal-free space for the ANT 30 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Distance D: ANT 1 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Distance D: ANT 4 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 Distance D: ANT 12 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
vi MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5-25 Distance D: ANT 18 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Distance D: ANT 30 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Dimensioned drawing of SLG 75 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 1 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 4 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 12 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 18 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 30 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33 ASM 450 connecting cables with split toroidal cores (example) 5-22. . . . . . . .
5-34 Antenna line with round cores 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35 Read/write antenna SLA 71 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36 Transmission window of the SLA 71 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37 Metal-free space for SLA 71 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38 Distance D: SLA 71 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-39 Dimensioned drawing of SLA 71 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Configurator of ASM 400 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Connectors and their assignment for the ASM 400 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for the ASM 400 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Settings on the channel module 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Module rack ER 701-3 (S5-115U) 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 Central controller S5-135U/ -155U 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Central controller S5-155U/-155H 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Expansion unit EG S5-183U for S5-135U/-155U 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Expansion unit EG S5-184U for S5-135U/-155U 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 Expansion unit EG S5-185U for S5-135U/-155U/-155H 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 Expansion unit EG S5-187U for S5-135U/-155U 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 ASM 450/452 interface 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Configurator for ASM 450/452 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Connector ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) 6-30. . . . . .
6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V supply 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 450/452 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28 Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 450/452 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance 6-35
6-31 ASM 454/424 interface 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32 Configurator for the ASM 454/424 6-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG 6-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user 6-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 454/424 6-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36 How to mount the adapter plate 6-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37 Interface module ASM 456 with M12, 7/8” or
ECOFAST connection block 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
vii
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6-38 Basic design of the ASM 456 6-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Configurator ASM 456 6-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40 Setting PROFIBUS addresses on connection block M12, 7/8” 6-47. . . . . . . . .
6-41 Loosening the configuration plug’s screw connection 6-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42 Setting PROFIBUS address on configuration plug 6-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43 Connecting the ASM 456 up to protective earth 6-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44 Connecting cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m 6-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45 Extension cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m 6-52. . . . .
6-46 LEDs of the ASM 456 6-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47 Dimensional drawing of ASM 456 (in mm) 6-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48 ASM 470/475 interface 6-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49 Configurator for the ASM 470/475 6-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 6-64. . . . . . . . . . .
6-51 Wiring from the ASM 470/475 to the SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-66. . . . . . . . . . .
6-52 Baring of the cable shield for a cable made by the customer 6-66. . . . . . . . . . .
6-53 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog 6-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54 ASM 473 interface 6-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55 Configurator for the ASM 473 6-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56 Maximum configuration of the ASM 473 on one ET 200X 6-74. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57 Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 473 6-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules 6-76. . . . . .
6-59 ASM 724/754 interface 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-60 Configurator for the ASM 724 and ASM 754 6-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61 Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the SLA 71 6-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62 Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user 6-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 724/754 with mounting holes 6-85. . . . . . . .
6-64 How to mount the adapter plate 6-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65 Configurator for SIM (example) 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66 Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM 6-88. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67 Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS 6-89. .
6-68 Installation with one connecting cable for rugged environments 6-93. . . . . . . .
6-69 Installation with several connecting cable on the SIM connector 6-93. . . . . . .
6-70 Installation with test cable and plug-in power supply (see Section 3.7.3) 6-94
6-71 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 232 6-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 422 6-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73 DI/DO cabling with power supply 6-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-74 SIM 70 ANT 0 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-75 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0 6-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-76 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 0 6-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-77 Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 0 6-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-78 Metal-free space for the SIM 70 ANT 0 6-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-79 SIM 70 ANT 1 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-80 Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 1 6-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-81 Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 1 6-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-83 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 1 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-84 SIM 72 6-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-85 Transmission window of the SIM 72 6-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-86 Metal-free space of the SIM 72 6-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-87 Distance D: SIM 72 6-113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-88 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 72 6-113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 MOBY wide-range power supply 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Connector pin assignment 24 V output 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
viii MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7-3 Dimensions of the MOBY wide-range power supply 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Hardware of the STG E 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Configurator of ES 030-K 7-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Configuration example ES 030-K 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
ix
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Tables
2-1 Technical data of MOBY E (field components) 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Time constants K and tbyte 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects 3-11. . . . . . . . .
3-3 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 18/ANT 30 3-28. . . . . . . .
3-6 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SIM 70/SLG 75 with ANT 1 and SLA 71 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 4 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72 3-31. .
3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS E600 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Sources of interference: origins and effects 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 Causes of coupling paths 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 Cable configuration 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Connector assignment of the SLG connector 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector 3-60. . . . . . . . .
3-17 Connector assignment of SLA connector 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector 3-61. . . . . . . . .
3-19 Connector assignment for 4-pin power supply connector
(pin on the side of the housing) 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Ordering data for the power supply connector 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Ordering data for the SLG connector 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Overview of MDS 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS 4-3. . . . . . . .
4-3 Ordering data for MDS E600 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Technical data of the MDS E600 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Field data of MDS E600 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Ordering data for MDS E611 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Technical data of the MDS E611 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Field data of MDS E611 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Ordering data for MDS E623 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Technical data of the MDS E623 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Field data MDS E623 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Dimensions of MDS E623/installation space in accordance
with DIN 69873 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Ordering data for MDS E624 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 Technical data of the MDS E624 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Field data of MDS E624 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Overview table of SLG/SLA 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 72 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Technical data of the SLG 72 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Field data of SLG 72 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Ordering data for the SLG 75 and ANT xx 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Technical data of the SLG 75 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xMOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5-7 Technical data of the antennas 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Cable specification of the ANT 12 antenna 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Field data of the SLG 75 with antenna 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Standard connecting cables which will take split toroidal cores 5-22. . . . . . . . .
5-11 Ordering data for the SLA 71 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Technical data of the SLA 71 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Field data of SLA 71 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Overview of the interfaces 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Ordering data for the ASM 400 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Technical data of the ASM 400 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Ordering data for the ASM 410 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Technical data of the ASM 410 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Operating modes for ASM 410 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Ordering data for the ASM 450/452 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Technical data of the ASM 450/452 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Ordering data for the ASM 454/424 6-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Technical data of the ASM 454/424 6-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Connection assignment for ECOFAST connector plugs 6-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 Connection assignment for M12 connector (PROFIBUS DP) 6-50. . . . . . . . . .
6-16 Connection assignment for 7/8” connector (supply voltages) 6-50. . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Pin assignment 6-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 Status LEDs for ASM 456 6-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 LED display for PROFIBUS diagnosis 6-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Technical data of ASM 456 6-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 Ordering data of ASM 456 6-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Ordering data for the ASM 470/475 6-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Technical data of the ASM 470/475 6-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 470/475 6-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25 Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475 6-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 Ordering data for the ASM 473 6-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27 Technical data of the ASM 473 6-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28 Prerequisite for operation of the ASM 473 6-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29 Ordering data for the ASM 724/754 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30 Technical data of the ASM 724/754 6-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal 6-90. . . . . . . .
6-32 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 6-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33 Minimum distance from SIM to SIM 6-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Overview of the SIM connector allocation 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35 Voltage supply of SIM 6-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36 Cable configuration SIM 6-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41 Ordering data for the SIM 72 6-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72 6-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Ordering data for the MOBY wide-range power pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Technical data of the wide-range connector power pack 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xi
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7-5 Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in power pack 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Ordering data for the STG E 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 Ordering data for the ES 030-K 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 Technical data of the ES 030-K 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 General Errors B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2 Error messages of FB 250 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4 Error messages of FB 240 B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1 Compatibility of MOBY E components (as at July 2003) D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xii MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Contents
1-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
General
This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and
configure your MOBY E system. It covers the guidelines on configuration
and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual com-
ponents.
The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you
when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY pro-
ducts.
You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world.
Telephone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
General news on MOBY E or an overview of our other identification systems
are available on the Internet under the following address.
http://www.siemens.de/moby
Technical support
Internet
1
1-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
General
2-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Introduction to MOBY E
MOBY E is an RF identification system with low-cost EEPROM data storage
for optimization of material handling and production processes for the low-
end and medium-range performance level. This powerful system offers high-
speed data transmission between data memories (i.e. MDSs) and read/write
devices (i.e. SLGs).
MOBY E is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e.
without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parame-
ters must be carried on the object.
Storage, logistics, and distribution
Merchandise distribution
Product identification
Container identification
Assembly lines
Tool identification
Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY E (field components)
Storage capacity 752 bytes for use as desired
Memory type EEPROM
Data organization Address-oriented
Protection rating IP65 to IP68
Operating temperature –25 to +125°C
Data transmission speed (SLG -
MDS)
≥ 2.55 ms/byte for reading
≥ 2.8 ms/byte for writing
Read/write distance 0 to 100 mm
Can be connected to SIMATIC S 5/S7, PCs, computers, PLCs of
other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS
Principal
application areas
Technical data of
MOBY E
2
2-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
MDS: Mobile data memory
SLA: Read/write antenna
SLG: Read/write device
SIM: Serial Interface Module
ASM: Interface module
Service and test device
MDS E623
Pill
SLG 75 ANT 12
SLG 75 ANT 18
SLG 75 ANT 30
SLG 75 ANT 1
SLG 75 ANT 4
SLG 72 SIM 72
MOBY E
MDS E600
MOBY E
MDS E611
MDS E624
752 Byte EEPROM
Button
MDS E600
752 Byte EEPROM
ISO-Card
MDS E611
752 Byte EEPROM
EPOXY-Card
MOBY E
RS 232 / RS 422
SIM 70 ANT 0
SIM 70 ANT 1
752 Byte EEPROM
SLA 71
SIEMENS SIEMENS
ASM 456
for
PROFIBUS
DPV1 connection
with FB/FC 45
for SIMATIC S7
X1
X2
PC
SIMs can be
operated directly on
a serial interface
ASM 400
for SIMATIC
115U
135U
155U/H
with
FB 250/230
ASM 410
for SIMATIC
90U
95U
100U/H
ET 100
ET 200
ASM 450/452
for
PROFIBUS DP/
DPV1 connection
with FB/FC for
SIMATIC S5/S7
ASM 424
to connect
to
PC
External
PLC
SINUMERIK
computer via
serial Interface
ASM 454
for
PROFIBUS DPV1
connection with
FC 45
for SIMATIC S7
ASM 470/475
for SIMATIC
S7-300 with
FC 47/FC 45
ET 200M
with
FB 47/FC 47
ASM 473
Connectable
to ET 200X;
control via
PROFIBUS
DPV1 with
FC 45
ASM 724
to connect
to
PC
External
PLC
SINUMERIK
computer via
serial Interface
ASM 754
for
PROFIBUS DPV1
connection with
FC 45
for SIMATIC S7
Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1,000 m
Inductive power/data transmission (13.56 MHz)
Max. of 55 m
Figure 2-1 Overview of MOBY E components
Overview of
MOBY E
components
Introduction to MOBY E
3-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3
3-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1 Basic Requirements
!Warning
Do not make changes to the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE
and the manufacturer’s warranty.
To choose the correct MOBY E components, apply the following criteria to
your particular application.
Transmission distance (i.e. read/write distance)
The amount of data to be transferred
Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG/SLA
Static of dynamic transmission of the data
Speed for dynamic transmission
Tolerances of the tracking
Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical effects,
and so on)
Maximum write frequency per MDS
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1.1 Transmission Window
The read/write device (i.e. SLG/SLA) generates an inductive alternating
field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG/SLA and decreases in
strength the further away from the SLG/SLA it moves. Distribution of the
field depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG/SLA
and the MDS.
MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved
at a distance of Sg from the SLG/SLA. The figure below shows the transmis-
sion window between the MDS and the SLG/SLA.
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Sa
Sg
View of the side
View of the top
Transmission
window
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Ld
MDS
MDS
SP
ANT 1
L (Sa,min) = Lmax
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
L (Sa,max) = Ld
Sa: Working distance between the MDS and SLG/SLA
Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the
SLG/SLA and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under
normal conditions.)
L: Length of a transmission window.
The length Ld is valid for the calculation.
In the case of Sa, min, the field length increases from Ld to Lmax.
PI: Point of intersection of the symmetry axes of the MDS
Figure 3-1 Transmission window
The active field to the MDS is a circle. See view from top.
The MDS can be processed as soon as the point of intersection (IP) of the
MDS enters the circle of the transmission window.
If an MDS E600 or E611 enters the transmission window diagonally (hatched
portion in Figure 3-1), the length of the field is reduced by approx. 15 per-
cent.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is
possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area be-
comes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only
static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg.
The MDS and the SLG/SLA do not have a polarization axis (i.e. the MDS
can come from any direction, assume any position and traverse the transmis-
sion window). The active area is shown below (i.e. for vertical, horizontal
and diagonal operation).
L
W
or or
L
W
WL
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Figure 3-2 Direction of movement of the MDS
When static operation is used, the MDS can be processed into the area of the
limit distance (i.e. Sg). The MDS must be positioned exactly over the SLG/
SLA as shown below.
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
Sg
Transmission
window
MDS
ANT 1
Figure 3-3 Working in static operation
Direction of
movement of the
MDS
Working in static
operation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
View of the top
MDS
SP
SP
MDS
Transmission
window
Figure 3-4 Working in dynamic operation
The following approximation formula applies to practical applications:
B0, 4 L
W: Width of the transmission window
L: Length of the transmission window
The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the
tolerance of mechanical tracking. When W is maintained, the formula can be
used without restriction for the transmit period.
There are generally secondary fields in the range from 0 to 20 mm.
However, they should only be considered for configuration in exceptional
cases because the write/read intervals are only very limited. Exact details on
the field geometry of the secondary fields cannot be provided because the
values very much depend on the working distance and the application.
Working in
dynamic operation
Width of the
transmission
window
Transmission
window with
secondary fields
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS
The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the trans-
mission window of an SLG/SLA. During this time, the SLG/SLA can ex-
change data with the MDS.
The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below.
tVL0, 8 [m]
VMDS ms
tV :Transmit period of the MDS
L: Length of the transmission window
VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation
0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and pro-
duction tolerances.
During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The
transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude commu-
nication with the MDS.
During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system
environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the
transmit period or vice versa.
General formula:
tVtK
tV :Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG/SLA
tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS
Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS is asynchronous with a
transmission speed of 19200 baud.
General formula:
tKKtByte n
Calculation of the maximum amount of user data:
nmax tVK
tByte
tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS
tV :Transmit period
n: Amount of user data in bytes
To achieve optimal performance, “n” may not be set to more than
160.
nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation
tByte: Transmission time for 1 byte (see Table 3-1)
K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It con-
tains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time
required for command transmission (see Table 3-1).
Table 3-1 Time constants K and tbyte
K [ms]
tbt [ms]
Operating Mode
K [
ms
]
t
byte
[
ms
]
O
pera
ti
ng
M
o
d
e
35
51
20
2.55
2.8
–
Read; Normal operation
Write; Normal operation
Read ID number (4 bytes)
This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of sev-
eral subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand.
The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmis-
sion is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the
command automatically.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program
The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the
following factors.
Cycle time, token rotation time and type of programmable controller
Software used (FB 41, FB 47, FC 44, FC 45, FC 47, FB 240, FB 250)
Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three
steps.
a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next
time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the
ASM.
b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG/SLA. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When the
FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write command
are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished
message.
See applicable documentation for the exact communication times be-
tween ASM and user.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.1.5 Sample Calculation
A transport system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of
VMDS = 0.75 m/s. The following MOBY E components were selected.
ASM 400 (with FB 250)
SLG 75 ANT 1
MDS E600
Task:
a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant.
b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to
the programmer.
For technical data of the components, see the tables in Section 3.2 (”field
data of MDS, SLG and SLA”).
H
Direction of movement
0 < H < Sa
(View of the side)
0 < H < 50 mm
MDS
SLG
Figure 3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet
Customer
application
Tolerance of the
height allowance
of the pallet
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ANT 1
W
Middle line of the MDS and SLG
Tolerance range of the side allowance
Direction of movement of the MDS
W = Width of the transmission win-
dow in dynamic operation
MDS
Figure 3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet
See Table 3-4 for this value.
See Table 3-3 for this value.
tvL*0,8
VMDS 0, 06 m*0,8
0, 75 ms0, 064 s64 ms
For normal operating mode, see Table 3-1 for the values of K and tbyte.
Calculation of nmax
Read:
tv K
tByte 64 ms 35 ms
2, 55 ms 11, 37 nmax 11 Byte
Write:
tv K
tByte 64 ms 51 ms
2, 8 ms 4, 64 nmax 4Byte
Up to 11 bytes can be read or 4 bytes can be written when the MDS passes
by.
Tolerances of the
side allowance of
the pallet
Minimum distance
between SLG/SLA
and SLG/SLA
Minimum distance
between MDS and
MDS
Maximum number
of bytes
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA
The table below shows the field data of all MOBY E MDS, SLG and SLA
components. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG/SLA particularly
easy.
All technical data are typical data, based on an ambient room temperature of
0 to +50 °C, a supply voltage of 22 to 27 V DC, and metal-free surround-
ings. Tolerances of +20 % are permitted for production conditions and
temperature fluctuations.
Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range
from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG/SLA, and/or the entire temper-
ature range is utilized for MDS and SLG/SLA.
Table 3-2 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects
MDS
SLG/SLA
MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233MDS E624
Length of the transmission window in mm (L)
SLA 71 (Ld) 605805--- 38
SLG 72 (Lx)2
(Ly)2
755
505
905
605
--- 60
40
SLG 75 ANT 1 (Ld) 605805--- 38
SLG 75 ANT 4 (Ld) 220 250 --- 200
SLG 75 ANT 12 (Ld) --- --- 8 ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 (Ld) --- --- 4 12
SLG 75 ANT 30 (Ld) --- --- --- 14
Width of the transmission window in mm (W)
SLA 71 24 32 --- 15 (38)1
SLG 72 (Wx)2
(Wy)2
30
20
36
24
--- 24
16
SLG 75 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1
SLG 75 ANT 4 30 36 --- 24
SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 4 ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 245 (12)1
SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 7
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-2 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects
MDS MDS E624MDS E6233
MDS E611MDS E600
SLG/SLA
Working distance in mm (Sa)
SLA 71 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25
SLG 72 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 30
SLG 75 ANT 1 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25
SLG 75 ANT 4 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25
SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 0 to 4 ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8
SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 0 to 18
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
SLA 71 70 100 --- 40
SLG 72 70 100 --- 40
SLG 75 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40
SLG 75 ANT 4 70 100 --- 35
SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 5 ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 6 15
SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 24
1The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation.
2 For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2.
3 MDS E623 together with SIM 75 ANT 12 only in static operation.
4 A maximum average deviation of ±2 mm (without affecting the field data) is permitted in static operation.
5 Reduction by approx. 15 % when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally. See also Figure 3-1.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-13
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-3 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624
SLA 71 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
SLG 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
SLG 75 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
SLG 75 ANT 4 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- > 20 mm ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm
SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- > 60 mm
Table 3-4 Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA
SLA 71 SLG 72 SLG 75
ANT 1
SLG 75
ANT 4
SLG 75
ANT 12
SLG 75
ANT 18
SLG 75
ANT 30
SLA 71 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm
SLG 72 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm
SLG 75 ANT 1 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm
SLG 75 ANT 4 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm
SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- --- --- > 80 mm > 125 mm ---
SLG 75 ANT 18 > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 125 mm > 125 mm > 200 mm
SLG 75 ANT 30 > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 200 mm > 200 mm
Note
Adherence to the values specified in Table 3-4 is essential. There is a danger
of the influence of inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would
increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be
terminated with errors.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data
The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY E MDS and SLG
components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in Sec-
tion 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical op-
eration with a single length of the transmission window (Ld).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 102030405060708090100
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
Write MDS E600
Read MDS E600
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-7 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E611
Read MDS E611
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-8 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-15
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 102030405060708090100
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E624
Read MDS E624
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-9 SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
0 102030405060708090100110120130
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E600
Read MDS E600
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
0.5
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
5.0
5.5
Figure 3-10 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E611
Read MDS E611
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
0.5
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
5.0
5.5
Figure 3-11 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window)
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
0 102030405060708090100
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E624
Read MDS E624
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
0.5
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
5.0
5.5
Figure 3-12 SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-17
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 102030405060708090100110120130
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E600
Read MDS E600
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-13 SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E611
Read MDS E611
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-14 SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 102030405060708090100
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS E624
Read MDS E624
1.67
1.33
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.5
1.17
0.83
0.5
1.83
Figure 3-15 SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-19
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.4 Installation Guidelines
The MDS, SLG and SLA are devices which work with induction. Every type
of metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of
these devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data
described in Section 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered
to when configuring and installing the devices.
Minimum distance between two read/write devices or read/write anten-
nas. (See Table 3-4 and Chapter 5)
Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories.
(See Table 3-3 and Chapter 4)
Metal-free area with flush installation of SLG/SLA and MDS in metal
Installation of several SLGs/SLAs in metal frames or supports
The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings af-
fects the identification system.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.4.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area
Do not mount the MDS directly on metal (exception: MDS E623). Mounting
the MDS directly on metal will interrupt all its functions. The following figu-
res show the minimum distance of the MDS to metal.
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h ≥ 20 mm
Figure 3-16 Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
b
a
h
Standard values: a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm
Figure 3-17 Flush mounting: MDS E600/E611
Metal-free space
for MDS
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-21
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Data memory
Mounting on metal
MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal.MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal.
SIEMENS
6GT2 300-0CD00
MDS E623
Figure 3-18 Mounting on metal: MDS E623
Flush mounting in metal
Metal
Data memory
MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal.
SIEMENS
6GT2 300-0CD00
MDS E623
Figure 3-19 Metal-free space for MDS E623
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-22 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h ≥ 20 mm
SIEMENS
6GT2 300-0CE00
MDS E624
MOBY E
Figure 3-20 Mounting on metal: MDS E624
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h ≥ 20 mm
a ≥ 20 mm
SIEMENS
6GT2 300-0CE00
MDS E624
MOBY E
Figure 3-21 Flush mounting in metal (static): MDS E624
Underranging the standard values (i.e. a, b and h) will reduce the field data
considerably. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws (i.e. M4 counter-
sunk screws). This has no substantial effect on the range.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-23
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
When mounting the SLG/SLA, remember that metal in the vicinity of the
antennas may affect the field data. Typical distances to metal are shown in
the drawings below.
The cylindrical ANT 18 antenna can be mounted in metal with a minimum
distance of 10 mm as shown in the following drawing. The field data are not
affected.
10
10
ANT 18
Figure 3-22 Flush mounting in metal (static): ANT 18
Metal-free space
for SLG/SLA
SLG 75 ANT 18
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-24 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ANT 1 resp. ANT 4 antenna can be mounted as shown in the following
drawings. Remember that the field size may be reduced. (see Section 3.4.2)
ANT 1
SLG
Non-metal
Metal
SLG
Metal
Metal
SLG
Metal
40
20
Non-metal
Metal Metal
ANT 1
ANT 1
20
Figure 3-23 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 1
Metal
SLG
Metal
Metal
SLG
Metal
40
ANT 4
ANT 4
Figure 3-24 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 4
SLG 75 ANT 1,
SLG 75 ANT 4
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-25
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Since the height of the housing of the SLG 72 with integrated antenna provi-
des a sufficient distance to the metallic base, the device can be mounted di-
rectly on metal. When flush mounting is used, remember to maintain the spe-
cified distance to metal on the sides.
Metal
h = Physical height of the SLG = 40 mm
h
Figure 3-25 Mounting on metal: SLG 72
b
Metal
a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm
b
a
a
Figure 3-26 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 72
SLG 72
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-26 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
With the SLG 75 with ANT 12, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal.
This reduces the working and limit distance (see Section 3.4.2)
ANT 12
Figure 3-27 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12
With the SLG 75 with ANT 30, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal.
A distance of 20 mm must be maintained to the front of the antenna. This
reduces the field data (see Section 3.4.2)
20
20
ANT 30
Figure 3-28 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30
SLG 75 ANT 12
SLG 75 ANT 30
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-27
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The SLA 71 can be mounted flush in metal. Remember that the field data
may be reduced (see Section 3.4.2)
Metal-free area for flush mounting
a = 40 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 20 mm (non-metallic base)
Figure 3-29 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71
SLA 71
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-28 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.4.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window
The following general points apply to the mounting of MOBY E compo-
nents.
The MDS may not be mounted directly on metal.
(exception: MDS E623)
Flush installation of the components in metal will reduce the field data. A
test is recommended for critical applications.
When working in the transmission window, make sure that metal rails or
similar do not cut through the transmission field.
The metal rail would affect the field data.
In the case of the SLG 75 ANT 1/SIM 70 ANT 1, SLG 75 ANT 4 and
SLG 72/SIM 72, the field is practically unaffected as of a distance of 40
mm to metal; in the case of the SIM 70 with the ANT 0 this is the case as
of 10 mm.
Using tables and graphics, this chapter shows how the field data (i.e. Sg, Sa,
L, and W) are affected by metal. The values in the tables represent the reduc-
tion of field data in % as related to non-metal (i.e. 100% stands for no effect).
Table 3-5 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 18/ANT 30
SIM 70
SLG 75
No Metal
[%]
Mounted Flush in Metal
[%]
MDS
ANT 0
ANT 18
ANT 30 ANT 0
ANT 18
Metal-free
10 mm
circumfe-
rence;
10 mm in
depth
ANT 30
Metal-free
20 mm
circumfe-
rence;
20 mm in
depth
MDS E623
MDS without metal 100 --- 100 ---
MDS on metal 80 --- 80 ---
MDS flush mounted in metal 60 --- 60 ---
MDS E624
MDS without metal 100 100 100 80
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
100 90 100 75
MDS flush mounted in metal
Distance 20 mm/
Circumference 20 mm
100 75 100 70
MDS and
SIM 70 with ANT 0
and SLG 75 and
ANT 18/ANT 30
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-29
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-6 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %):
MDS and SIM 70/SLG 75 with ANT 1 and SLA 71
MDS
SIM 70
SLG 75
SLA 71
ANT 1/SLA 71
without Metal
[%]
ANT 1/SLA 71
on Metal
Distance 20 mm
[%]
ANT 1/SLA 71
Flush in Metal
Distance of 20 mm
Circumference
40 mm
[%]
ANT 1/SLA 71
on Metal
[%]
MDS E600
MDS without metal 100 100 80 70
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 60 50
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 60 50 40
MDS E611
MDS without metal 100 100 80 70
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
75 75 55 45
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 70 50 40
MDS E624
MDS without metal 100 100 80 60
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
100 100 80 60
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
80 60 60 40
MDS and SIM 70/
SLG 75 with ANT 1
and SLA 71
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-7 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 4
MDS
SLG 75 ANT 4
without Metal
[%]
ANT 4
on Metal
[%]
ANT 4
Flush in Metal
Circumference 40 mm
[%]
MDS E600
MDS without metal 100 80 70
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 60
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 60 50
MDS E611
MDS without metal 100 80 70
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 60
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 60 50
MDS E624
MDS without metal 100 80 80
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 70
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
60 40 40
Table 3-8 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12
MDS
SLG 75 ANT 12
without Metal
[%]
ANT 12
Flush in Metal
Distance 10 mm
Circumference 10 mm
[%]
ANT 12
Flush Mounted
in Metal
[%]
MDS E623
MDS without metal 100 85 85
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
100 85 85
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
75 75 60
MDS and
SLG 75 with ANT 4
MDS and SLG 75
with ANT 12
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-31
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-9 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72
MDS
SLG/SIM 72 Without Metal
[%]
On Metal
[%]
Flush in Metal
Circumference 40 mm
[%]
MDS E600
MDS without metal 100 100 100
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 70
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 60 60
MDS E611
MDS without metal 100 100 80
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
80 70 70
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
70 60 60
MDS E624
MDS without metal 100 100 80
MDS on metal
Distance 20 mm
100 80 80
MDS mounted flush in metal
Distance 20 mm/
circumference 20 mm
60 40 40
MDS and
SLG 72/SIM 72
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-32 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Below are figures using the ANT 1 with MDS E611 as an example to illus-
trate how metal affects the transmission window.
The percentages apply to field data reduction in relation to a metal-free envi-
ronment (i.e. 100%).
MDS E611
ANT 1
100%
Non-metal
MDS E611
ANT 1
70%
Metal
MDS E611
ANT 1
100%
MDS E611
ANT 1
80%
Metal
20 mm
Non-metal
20 mm
40 mm 40 mm40 mm
Metal
Non-metal
Figure 3-30 MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E 611)
MDS in metal-free
environment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-33
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
MDS E611
ANT 1
75%
Non-metal
MDS E611
ANT 1
Metal
ANT 1
70%
Non-metal
ANT 1
45%
Metal
Non-metal
Metal
MDS E611
Non-metal
Metal
20 mm
40% MDS E611
Non-metal
Non-metal
20 mm
Metal
Metal
20 mm
20 mm
20 mm
20 mm 20 mm
20 mm
Figure 3-31 The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611)
MDS in metallic
environment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-34 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects
Sheet metal
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
Metal supports
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Bad:
A metal support is located over
the second transmission win-
dow of the SLG. This support
affects the entire field. Particu-
larly the transmission window
between SLG and MDS is redu-
ced.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Good:
The transmission window is no
longer affected when the MDS
and the ANT 1 are mounted dif-
ferently.
Sa
Non-metallic spacer
Metal
MDS
MDS
ANT 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ANT 1
Figure 3-32 Interfering metal supports
Interfering metal
supports
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-35
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Non-metallic spacer
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
It is usually possible to mount the
MDS and SLG flush. This does,
however, considerably reduce
the size of the transmission win-
dow. You can counteract the re-
duction in window size using the
following measures:
Metal
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Increase the size of the non-me-
tal spacer below the MDS and/or
SLG. The MDS and/or SLG are
10 to 20 mm higher than the me-
tal environment.
(The value x ≥ 100 mm applies
to the SLG 75 ANT 1. It specifies
that at a distance of x ≥ 100 mm
the SLG is no longer significantly
affected by metal).
10-20 mm
x ≥ 100 mm
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Increase in the non-metallic distan-
ces a and b (see Figure 3-26).
The following rules of thumb apply:
Make a and b approximately 2
to 3 times larger.
In the case of SLG/MDS with a
large limit distance
(SLG 75 ANT 1/MDS E611), an
increase of a, b has a greater
effect than in the case of SLG/
MDS with a small limit distance.
Sheet metal
Metal
aa
b
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ANT 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ANT 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ANT 1
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
b
Figure 3-33 Flush mounting
Each SLG/SLA mounted on metal connects part of the field to the metal sup-
port. When minimum distance D is maintaining and metal-free areas a and b
are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of an
iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will lengthen
data transmission times or cause sporadic error messages on the interface.
Flush mounting
Installation of
several SLG/SLA
on metal frames or
supports
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-36 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
a) Lengthen distance D between the two ANT 1s
ANT 1 ANT 1
D
b) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields
ANT 1 ANT 1
c) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the
ANT 1 and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of
the field on the support.
Non-metallic
spacer
ANT 1 ANT 1
Necessary actions
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-37
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories
The MDS E600 is resistant to the substances listed in the following table.
Table 3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS E600
Substance Concentration
Salt water 5%
Sugar water 10%
Acetic acid, hydrous solution 5%
Sodium carbonate, hydrous solution 5%
Ethyl alcohol, hydrous solution 60%
Ethylene glycol 50%
Fuel, B In accordance with ISO 1817
Human perspiration
(Reference: ISO 10373 / ISO 7810)
MDS E600
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-38 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624)
Concentration 20 C 40 C 60 C
Allyl chloride
Formic acid 50%
100%
Ammonia, gaseous
Ammonia, liquid, anhydrous
Ammonium hydroxide 10%
Ethanol
Ethyl acrylate
Ethylene glycol
Gasoline, free of aromatic compounds
Gasoline, unstripped
Bezoates (Na, Ca and similar)
Bezoic acid
Benzine
Benzene-sulfonic acid
Benzyl chloride
Borax
Boric acid
Bromine, liquid
Bromine, gaseous, dry
Bromide (K, Na and similar)
Bromoform 100%
Bromide water
Butadiene (1.3–)
Butane, gaseous
Butanol
Butyric acid 100%
Carbonates (ammonium, Na and similar.)
Chlorine, liquid
Chlorine, gaseous, dry 100%
Chlorobenzene
Chloride (ammonia, Na and similar)
Chloroform
Chlorophyll
Chlorosulfonic acid 100%
Chlorine water (saturated solution)
Chromates (K, Na and similar) Up to 50%
Chromic acid Up to 30%
Chromic sulfuric acid
”Lemon acid”
Cyanamide
Cyanides (K, Na and similar)
Dextrine (hydrous solution)
Diethyl ether
Diethylene glycol
Dimethyl ether
Dioxan
Developer
Acetic acid 100%
Fixing bath
Fluorides (ammonium, K, Na and similar.)
Hydrofluoric acid Up to 40%
Formaldehyde 50%
Formamide 100%
MDS E611/
E623/E624
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-39
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624)
60 C40 C20 CConcentration
Gluconic acid
Glycerol
Glycocoll
Urine
Uric acid
Hydroxides (ammonium) 10%
Hydroxides (Na and K) 40%
Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal)
Hypochlorites (K, Na and similar)
Iodides (K, Na and similar)
Silicic acid
Cresylol Up to 90%
Methanol 100%
Methylene chloride
Lactic acid 100%
Mineral oils
Nitrates (ammonium, K and similar)
Nitroglycerin
Oxalic acid
Phenol 1%
Phosphates (ammonium, Na and similar)
Phosphoric acid 50%
85%
Propyl alcohol
Nitric acid 25%
Hydrochloric acid 10%
Brine
Sulfur dioxide 100%
Carbon bisulfide, 100%
Sulfuric acid 40%
Sulfurous acid
Soap solution
Sulfates (ammonium, Na and similar)
Sulfites (ammonium, Na and similar)
Tar, free of aromatic compounds
Turpentine
Trichlorethlylene
Hydrogen peroxide 30%
Tartaric acid
Explanation of the symbols
Resistant
Somewhat resistant
Not resistant
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-40 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5 EMC Guidelines
3.5.1 Foreword
The EMC guidelines contain the following information.
Why are the EMC guidelines necessary?
What interference affects the controller from the outside?
How can interference be prevented?
How can interference be corrected?
Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines?
Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup
The description is directed to “qualified personnel.”
Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with
the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines.
Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connecting cables
based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when
a malfunction occurs.
!Warning
Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in
the system or destroy either single components or the entire system.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-41
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.2 General
The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with
it the following characteristics.
Greater concentration of components
Increasing capacity of power electronics
Rising switching speeds
Lower current consumption of the components
The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will
interfere with one another.
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. EMC) is the ability of a piece of electri-
cal or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic envi-
ronment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings
within certain limits.
EMC can be divided into three areas.
Immunity to internal interference:
Resistance to internal (i.e. own) electrical interference
Immunity to external interference:
Resistance to external electromagnetic interference
Interference emission level:
Noise radiation and the effect on the electrical environment
All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device.
The MOBY modules are tested for adherence to the limit values contained in
the CE and BAPT guidelines. Since MOBY modules are only one of many
components in a total system and the combination of various components
may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to
when setting up a system.
EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which
must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system.
Note
The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines,
while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the com-
plete system.
All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the
need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources
later.
Country-specific provisions and regulations must be complied with. This
information is not covered in the documentation.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-42 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.3 Spreading of Interference
Three components are required so that interference can affect a system.
Source of interference
Coupling path
Potentially susceptible equipment
Potentially susceptible
device
For example: an ASM 470
Interference source
For example: a drive
Coupling path
For example: a MOBY cable
Figure 3-34 Spreading of Interference
If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the
source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the suscep-
tible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being
emitted.
The EMC measures affect all three components to prevent any malfunctions
caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all
possible measure to prevent the creation of sources of interference.
Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be
used in a system.
All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all
coils and windings.
The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the
individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible.
Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources.
The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a sys-
tem.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-43
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in
order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. a very
low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of
interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures.
Table 3-12 Sources of interference: origins and effects
Source of interference Interference origin Effect on potentially
susceptible equipment
Contactor, electronic
l
Contacts Power network malfunctions
valves Coils Magnetic field
Electric motor Collector Electrical field
Winding Magnetic field
Electric welding device Contacts Electrical field
Transformer Magnetic field, power network
malfunction, equalizing currents
Power pack, switched-
mode
Circuit Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field
Sender (e.g., industrial
radios)
Antenna Electromagnetic field
Difference in grounding
or reference potential
Voltage difference Equalizing currents
Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents,
electrical field
High-voltage current
cable
Current flow Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field
Sources of
interference
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-44 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can
take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling.
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
Galvanic coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Emission coupling
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
P
O
T
E
N
T
I
A
L
L
Y
S
U
S
C
E
P
T
I
B
L
E
D
E
V
I
C
E
Figure 3-35 The four kinds of interference coupling
When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can
act as coupling paths.
Table 3-13 Causes of coupling paths
Coupling path Cause
Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation
Missing or incorrectly connected shields
Cables spaced unfavorably
Switching cabinet or
SIMATIC h i
Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line
SIMATIC housing Missing or incorrect grounding
Cables spaced unfavorably
Modules not installed securely
Poor cabinet layout
Coupling paths
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-45
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.4 Cabinet Layout
User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system in-
cludes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and cor-
rect shielding of lines.
Note
For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see
the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller.
Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out
magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the in-
duced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening
of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in
the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e. with a high degree of con-
ductivity).
Figure 3-36 Shielding via housing
When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each
other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and
high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater
the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity.
This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires.
Shielding via
housing
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-46 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on
conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabi-
net, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power com-
ponents (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be instal-
led separately (i.e. separated by space) from the controller components (e.g.,
relay controllers and SIMATIC S5).
The following basic principles apply.
1. The effect of interference decreases the greater the distance between in-
terference source and potentially susceptible equipment.
2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates.
3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately
from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm.
PS
CPU/EU
Drive
Shield
sheet
metal
Figure 3-37 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout
Avoiding
interference via
optimal layout
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-47
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing
power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation
is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed
directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out
early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet.
Power filter
Is
Right
Power filter
Wrong
IS = interference current
Is
Figure 3-38 Filtering the supply voltage
Filtering the
supply voltage
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-48 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.5 Avoiding Interference Sources
Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree
of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a
frequent cause of interference in a system.
Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interfe-
rence must be suppressed with one of the following circuits.
When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even
with small relays. Several kV can be created on 220 V coils. By using free-
wheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and,
with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines.
Relay coils
Contactors
Valves
Brakes
Figure 3-39 Inductive interference
Note
All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Valves and motor
brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet
must be subjected to a special test.
Interference
suppression of
inductivities
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-49
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.6 Equipotential Bonding
Differing system part layouts and differing voltage levels can cause differ-
ences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are
connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal
lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals.
This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative.
The cross-section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough
(i.e. at least 10 mm2).
The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line
must be kept as small as possible (i.e. antenna effect).
A fine-wire line must be used (i.e. better conduction of high frequencies).
When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential
bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be
combined.
Power pack
PLC
EU
EU
EU
Drive
wrong
wrong
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Figure 3-40 Equipotential bonding
The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of
interference caused by fluctuations in potential.
Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding
of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch
voltages when devices malfunction.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-50 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY
SLG
230 V
AC
24 V
ASM
L+
L-
Ungrounded
power pack
Ground fault detector:
If there is a voltage imbalance to protec-
tive ground on the L+ or L– cables, the
circuit is interrupted.
Interface to the computer or PC
To connect a grounded computer or PC, the con-
nection must contain a galvanic coupling (e.g.,
optocoupler).
R
RR
R
Figure 3-41 Circuit diagram of the principle of ground fault monitoring
The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V
(i.e. signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400, the 0 V
signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the
SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is
equipotentially bonded (i.e. RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A
configuration with ground fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as
described in the SIMATIC manual if ground fault monitoring is necessary.
230 V
AC
24 V
Ground fault
monitoring
C
P
U
PLC 100
Galvanic isolation
SLG
ASM 410
Figure 3-42 SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410
The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU on
the module. A configuration with ground fault monitoring is possible without
any problems.
SIMATIC with
ASM 400
SIMATIC AG 100U
with ASM 410
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-51
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.8 Shielding the Cables
To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded.
The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However,
this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interfer-
ence-prone environment. In most cases, the use of braided shields is suffi-
cient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding ac-
tion.
Note
A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no
shielding effect.
The following basic principles apply.
For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on
the receiver side.
For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the
housing.
Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e. > 10 kHz),
connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large sur-
face.
Figure 3-43 Shielding of the cables
The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet
over a large surface (i.e. good conductivity) and must be located as close to
the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (high-
frequency clamp) to the shield rail or be bound with cable binders. The loca-
tion must have good conductivity.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-52 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Remove
paint
Cable binder
Figure 3-44 Connection of the shield rail
The shield bus must be connected with the protective ground (PE) bar.
When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to
the connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used.
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖ
Shield turned up backwards by
180° and connected with the
connector housing
Rubber
sleeve
Figure 3-45 Interruption of shielded cables
When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used,
the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interrup-
tion. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-53
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.5.9 Basic Rules on EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. EMC) can often be ensured by following
a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are
listed below.
Protect the programmable controller from external interference by instal-
ling it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be in-
cluded in the grounding connection.
Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable con-
troller with separator plates.
Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines.
Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large sur-
face.
Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and
the central grounding point.
Remember to connect the shield bus to ground. This means that there
must be a large-area connection of the shield bus to ground.
Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections.
Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately.
Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts
or bundles.
Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible,
at one level.
Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible.
Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conduc-
tors.
Shielding via
housing
Large-surface
grounding
connection
Planning the
cabling
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-54 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides.
Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the
drive).
Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield bus
over a large surface, and secure these with clamps.
Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module.
Use braided shields and not foil shields.
Only use power supply filters with metal housings.
Connect the filter housing (i.e. connection must be low HF resistant and
over a large surface) to cabinet ground.
Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces.
Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interfer-
ence source.
Shielding the lines
Power supply and
signal filter
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-55
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding
With MOBY the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422
interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG may
be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same as that
of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to shielding of
all data cables. The following figure shows the primary points required for a
secure layout.
Ï
Ï
230 V
AC
24 V
Additional power consumers
Additional
SLGs
The cable shield is ap-
plied to the SLG con-
nector on the appro-
priate shield pin.The ca-
ble shield of the SLG
may not be applied to a
grounded point (i.e. no
grounding clamp).
Each cabinet is
centrally grounded.
The voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the
2-pin connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped with
electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference
peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies
which may be caused by “additional power consumers.”
The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared
directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is used
for the connection of the cable shield to the groun-
ding bar. This will divert interference voltages of
±2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield connec-
tion is particularly important for long cables or in-
terference-prone industrial environments.
Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located
as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet.
The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large
surface and use short connections.
Figure 3-46 Simple layout with ASM 400
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-56 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
When the SLG is connected to the ASM 470/475, the cable must be laid via a
shield terminal. Shield connection terminals and holders are standard compo-
nents of the S7-300 product family.
Shield terminal Shield contact
element
Cable to SLG 1 Cable to SLG 2
Figure 3-47 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield contact element
To ensure EMC, an S7-300 shield contact element must be used for the SLG
cable (see Figure 3-47). The shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown
in Figure 3-48.
17030
Specifications in mm
Figure 3-48 Baring of the cable shield
Layout of an
S7-300 with MOBY
Cabling for
ASM 470
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-57
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Ï
Ï
220 V
AC
24 V
230 V
AC
24 V
Connection in the switching
cabinet (see Figure 3-46)
Standard SLG cable
to the ASM
Standard SLG cable
to the SLG
The mounting plate is
used to connect both
cable shields. This
ensures continuous
protection of the data
lines against interfe-
rence fields. Direct
connection on the
mounting plate with
protective ground is
not permitted since
otherwise equalizing
currents would flow
over the cable shield.
The housing of the power pack is provided with total
insulation.The protective conductor is omitted for
connection to the power network.
The cable jacket of the inco-
ming and outgoing cables must
be bared as shown. The cable
shields are provided with a ca-
ble clamp on the mounting
plate of the power pack.
6GT2 090-0HA00
Connection of the SLG
(see Figure 3-46)
Figure 3-49 Voltage supply with power pack
To divert interference which may occur on the connecting cable to the SLG,
proceed as described for the ASM 400.
Voltage supply of
the SLG with
power pack
Connection of
other modules
(e.g., ASM 410)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-58 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.7 Cable and Connector Assignments
The cable jacket of standard SLG connecting cables used with MOBY is
made of polyurethane (i.e. PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures
very good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions, hydraulic fluids
and high resistance to UV.
3.7.1 Cable Configuration
The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these
cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG
requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to
1,000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire.
The power consumption of the SLG causes the voltage on the connecting
cable to drop. The permissible cable length is usually shorter than 1000 m.
The length depends on the current consumption of SLG and the ohmic resist-
ance of the connecting cable. The following table gives you an overview of
the permitted cable lengths (for standard connecting cables see Table 3-22):
Table 3-14 Cable configuration
Conductor
cross-section
in mm2
Conductor
diameter in
mm
Resistance
W/km1
SLG 72
SLG 75 ANT 1/ANT 12/
ANT 18/ANT 30
max. cable length in m
(I=180 mA)
UV=24 V UV=30 V
0.0720.32550 40 100
0.2 0.5 185 120 300
0.5 0.8 70 310 790
0.821.0250 440 1000
1.521.4224 920 1000
1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conduc-
tors. A single wire has half the resistance.
2 Use of these conductor cross-sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG
connector.
Field with gray background:
Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable
is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A...
We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding
bar over a large surface.
The SLG/SIM can also be connected by means of a drum cable.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 x 2 x 0.25
The cable can be customized according to your requirements.
Grounding of the
cable
Drum
cable
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-59
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
When an additional power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the
max. 1000 m cable between the ASM and SLG can always be used.
230 V AC
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
SLG
Max. of 1000 m
24 V DC
6-core (with 24 V connection)
90 -
Note
Do not connect the 24 V line (pin 2 on the
SLG connector) to the ASM.
Figure 3-50 SLG with extra power pack
The power pack shown in the drawing can be ordered from Siemens under
the number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2)
Note
With some restrictions, the power pack can be used as the main power pack
for the ASM 400, ASM 724, or ASM 754. See Figure 3-51.
The maximum current of the power pack (2.2 A) may not be exceeded.
Ï
Ï
SLG
Pin allocation on
socket connector
1, 4
2, 3
GND
+24 V
90 -
230 V AC
24 V DC
Figure 3-51 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400
Supplementary
power pack
for SLG
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-60 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.7.2 Connector Assignment
Table 3-15 Connector assignment of the SLG connector1
Pin Designation
1- Receiving
2+ 24 V
3Ground (0 V)
4+ Sending
5- Sending
6+ Receiving
Cable shield
1 This connector can be used for: SLG 72, SLG 75 ANT 1/ANT 12/ANT 18/ANT 30
Table 3-16 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector1
Pin Designation
1Not used
2+ Sending
3+ Receiving
4Not used
5- Receiving
6- Sending
7Ground (0 V)
8+ 24 V (see caution note)
9Not used
Housing Cable shield
1 This connector assignment applies to ASM 400/424/454 => SLG; ES 030 => SLG
Note
When making your own cables, remember that the “sending” signal of the
SLG must be connected to the “receiving” signal of the ASM, or vice versa.
!Caution
When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not
wire this pin to the ASM. See Table 3-16.
SLG 72, SLG 75
1
6
5
4
3
2
Connector on the SLG
Connector on the ASM
9-pin subminiature D
connector with screw-
type attachment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-61
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-17 Connector assignment of SLA connector1
Pin Designation
1+12 Volt
2+ Sending
3+ Receiving
4Not used
5- Receiving
6- Sending
7Not used
8Ground (0 V)
1 This connector applies to: SLA 71
Table 3-18 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector1
Pin Designation
1+12 Volt
2+ Sending
3+ Receiving
4Not used
5- Receiving
6- Sending
7Ground (0 V)
8Not used
9Not used
1 This connector assignment applies to ASM 724, ASM 754 <=> SLA 71.
SLA 71
1
6
5
4
3
2
Connector on the SLA
8
7
9-pin subminiature D
connector with screw-
type attachment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-62 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-19 Connector assignment for 4-pin power supply connector (pin on the side
of the housing)
Pin Designation
1Ground (0 V)
2+ 24 V
3+ 24 V
4Ground (0 V)
Ordering data
Table 3-20 Ordering data for the power supply connector
Connector for power supply (socket)
for ASM 424/454/724/754
6GT2 390-1AB00
Power supply
connector on the
ASM 424/454/724/754
View of the top
1
4
2
3
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-63
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
If the SLG connector has to be turned in a different direction when using a
prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the
contact support differently.
The connector on the SLG cannot be turned.
Knurled screw for solid con-
nections (no tools needed)
Removable housing cover for
easy mounting
Cage-claw cable retainer
Crimp contacts for
use even with strong
vibration1
Secure the contact support
in 7 positions.
1 Crimping tool:
(type XZC0700, order no. 932507-001)
Available from
Hirschmann GmbH+Co.
D-72606 Nuertingen
Tel: +49 (0) 7127/14-1479
Figure 3-52 Drawing of mounting the SLG connector
Table 3-21 Ordering data for the SLG connector
Connector
SLG-side, 6-pin connector with socket
contacts for crimping angled (contact sup-
port can be fixed in 7 positions)
1 unit
1 pack (10 units)
straight
1 unit
6GT2 090-0BA00
6GT2 090-0BA10
6GT2 090-0UA00
Installing the SLG
connector
Ordering data
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-64 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.7.3 Connecting Cables
Housing
2
6
3
5
7
6
1
4
5
3
2
2
9-pin submini. D
(pins, screw-type
attachment)
SLG connector 2
(socket)
1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire
to the ASM
2 6GT2 091-0A... with angled SLG connector (standard)
6GT2 091-2A... with straight SLG connector (not shown)
SLG sideASM side
81
Figure 3-53 Connecting cable ASM 400/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG
Cable with wire end ferrules
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
(Shield)
1
4
5
3
2
SLG connector 2
(socket)
3 (7)
4 (8)
5 (9)
6 (10)
2
6
SLG sideASM side
1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire
to the ASM
2 6GT2 091-0D... with angled SLG connector (standard)
6GT2 091-2D... with straight SLG connector (not shown)
11
Figure 3-54 Connecting cable ASM 410 ↔ SLG
!Caution
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the inter-
face module and grounded on a grounding bar.
Connecting cable
ASM 400/424/454,
ES 030 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0A...
or
6GT2 091-2A...
Connecting cable
ASM 410 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0D...
or
6GT2 091-2D...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-65
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6
1
4
5
3
2
Two 5-pin, round M12 connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
SLG connector (socket)
2 m1
1 standard length
SLG sideASM side
X1 X2
25
18.5
Figure 3-55 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG
Cable with wire end ferrules
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
(Shield)
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Baring of the cable shield
SLG sideASM side
1 6GT2 091-0E... with angled SLG connector (standard)
6GT2 091-2E... with straight SLG connector (not shown)
SLG connector1
(socket)
Figure 3-56 Connecting cable ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG
Connecting cable
ASM 450/452/473
↔ SLG
6GT2 091-1C...
or
6GT2 091-2C...
Connecting cable
ASM 470/475
↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0E...
or
6GT2 091-2E...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-66 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
9-pin submini. D
(pins, screw-type
attachment)
Housing
1
2
3
4
5
6
PC sideASM side
9-pin submini. D
(socket, screw-
type attachment)
Housing
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RxDTxD
TxDRxD
0 V 0 V
l
Figure 3-57 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424/724
9-pin submini. D
(pins, screw-type
attachment)
1
2
3
4
5
6
SLA sideASM side
SLA connector
M12, socket
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5m
Pin 8 free
Figure 3-58 Connecting cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71
Connecting cable
RS 232
PC ↔ ASM 424/724
6GT2 391-0BH50 or
6GT2 391-0BN20
Connecting cable
ASM 724/754
↔ SLA 71
6GT2 391-1AH50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-67
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Connector M12, pin
for connecting cable
SLA 71
6GT2 391-1AH50
1
2
3
4
5
6
SLA sideCoupling connector side
SLA connector
M12, socket
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
l
Figure 3-59 Extension cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71
Connector M12
(pin)
1
2
3
4
5
6
SLG sideASM side
SLG connector
(socket)
7
8
2
5
3
4
6
1
7
l
Figure 3-60 Connecting cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG
Connector M12
(pin) 1
2
3
4
5
6
Coupling connector sideASM side
Connector M12
(socket) for
connecting cable
ASM 456
6GT2 091-0FH..
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
l
Figure 3-61 Extension cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG
Extension cable
ASM 724/754
↔ SLA 71
6GT2 391-1BN10
or
6GT2 391-1BN25
Connecting cable
ASM 456 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0FH20
or
6GT2 091-0FH50
Extension cable
ASM 456 ↔ SLG
6GT2 891-0F...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-68 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Housing
14
15
5
2
3
13
15-pin submin. D
(socket, screw-
type attachment)
(Shield)
PC (RS 232) side
SIM side
TxD
RxD
Ground
TxD
RxD
Ground
Test cable for DI/DO
and power supply
Designation
12345
Terminal
+ 24 V
Not used
DO0
Ground (0 V)
DI0
DO1
DO2
Not used
Ground (0 V)
Ground (0 V)
DPA0
DI1
GND signal ground
TxD send
RxD receive
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pin allocation for terminal module1
0.53 m 9
1
+ 24 V0 V
9-pin submini. D
(socket, screw-
type attachment)
678
91011121314 15
Connection for connector
power pack (6GT2090-0HB00)
Adapter
1 For the definition of the inputs/outputs,
see Section 6.10.2
5 m
Figure 3-62 Connecting cable for RS 232 PC ↔ SIM
Connecting cable
RS 232 PC e SIM
6GT2 391-1DH50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-69
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
3.7.4 Cable Lengths
The length key for MOBY cables is no longer supported as of 01.10.2001.
After that, cables will only be available in certain lengths (see Table 3-22).
The cable lengths are based on the following general rules:
Loose cables only come in lengths of 50 m, 120 m, and 800 m
Prepared cables are only available in the lengths listed below
Cables can still be made to any length (see Table 3-14) by the customer.
Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG plug-in line, ready-made
Between ASM 400/424/454, ES 030-K and SLG
Angled SLG connector
Length: 5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0AH50
6GT2 091-0AN10
6GT2 091-0AN20
6GT2 091-0AN50
Straight SLG connector
Length: 10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2AN10
6GT2 091-2AN50
Between ASM 410 and SLG
Angled SLG connector
Length: 5 m
10 m
20 m
6GT2 091-0DH50
6GT2 091-0DN10
6GT2 091-0DN20
Straight SLG connector
Length: 5 m 6GT2 091-2DH50
Between ASM 470/475 and SLG
Angled SLG connector
Length: 2 m
5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0EH20
6GT2 091-0EH50
6GT2 091-0EN10
6GT2 091-0EN20
6GT2 091-0EN50
Straight SLG connector
Length: 2 m
5 m
10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2EH20
6GT2 091-2EH50
6GT2 091-2EN10
6GT2 091-2EN50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-70 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG plug-in line, ready-made
Between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG
Angled SLG connector
Length: 2 m (Standard)
5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 091-1CH50
6GT2 091-1CN10
6GT2 091-1CN20
6GT2 091-1CN50
Straight SLG connector
Length: 2 m 6GT2 091-2CH20
Between ASM 456 and SLG
Angled SLG connector
Length: 2 m (Standard)
5 m
6GT2 091-0FH20
6GT2 091-0FH50
Extension for 6GT2 091-0FH..
Length: 2 m
5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 891-0FH20
6GT2 891-0FH50
6GT2 891-0FN10
6GT2 891-0FN20
6GT2 891-0FN50
Standard connecting cable between
SLA 71 ↔ ASM 724/ASM 754
(length 5 m, not included with SLA 71)
6GT2 391-1AH50
Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50
Length: 10 m
25 m
6GT2 391-1BN10
6GT2 391-1BN25
MOBY E SIM-RS 232 test cable with connecting line for
DI/DO and connection for power supply
(total length of 5 m)
6GT2 391-1DH50
Plug-in line, 24 V
Plug-in line, 2-core for the 24 V DC power supply of the
ASM 400. Plug-in line has plug connectors
on both sides
Length: 2 m
5 m
6GT2 091-0CH20
6GT2 091-0CH50
24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power supply unit
6GT2 494-0AA00 (length 5 m)
6GT2 491-1HH50
Plug-in line RS 232
Between PC and ASM 424/724
Length: 5 m
20 m
6GT2 391-0BH50
6GT2 391-0BN20
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-71
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables
Cable (without connector)
SLG cable, without connector between ASM and SLG;
Type 6 x 0.25 mm2
Length: 50 m
120 m
800 m
6GT2 090-0AN50
6GT2 090-0AT12
6GT2 090-0AT80
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
4-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Mobile Data Memories 4
4-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
4.1 Introduction
MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product
from the very beginning.
Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or its pack-
aging unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All impor-
tant information related to production and material flow control is included
right on the product.
Its sturdy design permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS
insensitive to many chemical substances.
The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e. MDS) include
logic, antenna and EEPROM.
When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read-write device/
read-write antenna (i.e. SLG/SLA), the power supply unit generates and
monitors the necessary power for all switching elements. The pulse-coded
information is conditioned for further processing as purely digital signals. In
addition to managing the various memories, the monitoring unit takes care of
data handling and the check routines.
Table 4-1 Overview of MDS
MDS type Memory size
gross/net
Temperature
range
(during opera-
tion)
Dimen-
sions
(W x H x D
in mm)
Pro-
tection
rating
MDS E600 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes
752 net byte capacity
–25 to +60 °C 85x54x0.8 IP68
MDS E611 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes
752 net byte capacity
–25 to +70 °C 85x54x2.5 IP67
MDS E623 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes
752 net byte capacity
–25 to +85 °C∅10x4.5 IP67
MDS E624 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes
752 net byte capacity
–25 to +125 °C∅27x4 IP67
Definition of IP67:
– Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof)
– Total protection again accidental touch
– Protection against water under certain pressure and time conditions
Definition of IP68:
– Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof)
– Total protection again accidental touch
– MDS can be submerged in water. Contact the manufacturer for requirements.
Definition of IPx9K:
– Steam jet at distance of 150 mm
– 10 of 15 l water per minute
– Pressure: 100 bar
– Temperature: 75 °C
Application area
Layout and
functions
Overview
Mobile Data Memories
4-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS
MDS E600 MDS E611 / MDS E623 /
MDS E624
Proof of physical strength is
determined by an oscillation
test.
Test conditions:
Frequency range
Amplitude of the dis-
placement
Acceleration
Test duration per axis
Throughput speed
ISO 7810, ISO 10373 EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3
2 to 500 Hz
7.5 mm (2 to 26 Hz)
20 g (26 to 500 Hz)
20 frequency cycles
1 octave/min.
Proof of physical strength is
determined by continuous
shock stress.
Test conditions:
Acceleration
Duration
Test duration per axis
EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3
100 g
6 ms
500 impacts per axis
Torsion and bending stress In accordance with
ISO 10373/
ISO 7816-1
Not permitted
Protection rating in accor-
dance with EN 60529
IP68 IP67
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and
storage
–25 °C to +60 °C
–25 °C to +60 °C
–25 °C to
+70 °C/+85 °C/+125 °C
–40 °C to
+85 °C/+100 °C/+150 °C
Temperature gradient over sto-
rage temperature range in ac-
cordance with part 2-4 of
DIN IEC 68
3 °C/min 3 °C/min
Temperature gradient for rapid
temperature change in accor-
dance with part 2-14 of
DIN IEC 68
Duration of 30 min per
maximum;
Transition from one
maximum to another:
approx. 10 sec,
100 cycles
Duration of 30 min per ma-
ximum;
Transition from one maxi-
mum to another: approx.
10 sec, 100 cycles
!Warning
The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur
continuously.
Operational
requirements/
environmental
requirements
Mobile Data Memories
4-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
4.2 MDS E600
Figure 4-1 MDS E600
Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS E600
Order Number
MDS E600 mobile data memory with 752-byte
EEPROM
6GT2 300-0AA00
Accessories:
Mounting bracket 6GT2 390-0AA00
Table 4-4 Technical data of the MDS E600
Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes
for use as desired
Memory organization Access as desired
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Minimum write cycles 200 000
Typical write cycles 1 000 000
Data retention time (at < +40 °C) > 10 years
Read/write distances See field data
Direction dependent No
Vibration ISO 10 373/ISO 7810
Torsion and bending stress ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1
Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket
Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP68
Physical layout Laminated PVC card, printable on
one side
Color Anthracite/white
Material PVC
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 85.6 x 54 x 0.76
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 4-4 Technical data of the MDS E600
Ambient temperature
during operation
during transportation and storage
–25 °C to +60 °C
–25 °C to +60 °C
Weight, approximate 6 g
Table 4-5 Field data of MDS E600
SLG 75
ANT 1
SLG 75
ANT 4
SLG 72 SLA 71
Working distance (Sa)0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm
Limit distance (Sg)70 mm 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm
Transmission
window (L)
60 mm (Ld)220 mm (Ld)75 mm (Lx)1
50 mm (Ly)1
60 mm (Ld)
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm
1 For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Field data
Mobile Data Memories
4-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
85.6 0.2
Dimensioned drawing
0.76 0.08
54 0.2
R3
110 +0.5
100 +0.3
65 +0.5
5 +0.5
MDS E600
Mounting bracket for MDS E600
The mounting bracket is secured on a non-metallic base with M4 counter-
sunk screws using the holes provided.
The mounting bracket must lay flat on the base. If not, locking will not work
and the MDS may fall out of the mounting bracket.
Note
The mounting bracket shown here (i.e. order no. 6GT2 390-0AA00) is not
suitable for the spacer shown in Figure 4-6 (6GT2 190-0AA00).
Section A-A:
AA
∅4.5
33 +0.3
Note
You can also use the mounting bracket (6GT2 190-0AB00) when
mounting the MDS E600 on metal, but only when used with the spacer
(6GT2 190-0AA00) (for dimensions see Figure 4-6).
Material: PA 6
Figure 4-2 MDS E600 and its mounting bracket
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
20 mm
Mounting on metal
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
b
a
h
Standard values: a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm
Flush mounting in metal
Figure 4-3 Metal-free space for MDS E600
Note
Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the
field data.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
4.3 MDS E611
Figure 4-4 MDS E611
Table 4-6 Ordering data for MDS E611
Order Number
MDS E611 mobile data memory
with 752-byte EEPROM
6GT2 300-0BB00
Accessories:
Spacer
Mounting bracket
6GT2 190-0AA00
6GT2 190-0AB00
Table 4-7 Technical data of the MDS E611
Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes
for use as desired
Memory organization Access as desired
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Minimum write cycles 200 000
Typical write cycles 1 000 000
Data retention time (at < +40 °C) > 10 years
Read/write distances See field data
Direction dependent No
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket
Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67
Physical layout Epoxy card
Color Anthracite/black
Material Fiber glass-reinforced epoxy resin
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 4-7 Technical data of the MDS E611
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 85.8 x 54.1 x 2.5
Ambient temperature
during operation
during transportation and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
Weight, approximate 21 g
Table 4-8 Field data of MDS E611
SLG 75
ANT 1
SLG 75
ANT 4
SLG 72 SLA 71
Working distance (Sa)10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm
Limit distance (Sg)100 mm 90 mm 100 mm 100 mm
Transmission
window (L)
80 mm (Ld)250 mm (Ld)90 mm (Lx)1
60 mm (Ly)1
80 mm (Ld)
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm
1 For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
60 0.2
Dimensioned drawing
∅3.2
85.8 0.2
2.5 0.2
54.1 0.2
Section A-A:
AA
R3
Figure 4-5 Dimensions of MDS E611
Field data
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
98
110
24
∅10∅4.5
36
62
60 Holding bracket
The spacer can be mounted directly on metal. Together with the mounting bracket, this
results in a distance of 20 mm between the MDS and metal.
Mounting:
– With 2 or 4 M4 screws
– With rubber pads on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes)
– With cable binders on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes)
34
21
∅2.5
88
57
Tabs
Holding knobs
107
121
Dimensioned drawing
Spacker: 6GT2 190-0AA00 Mounting bracket: 6GT2 190-0AB00
The tabs of the mounting bracket are secured to a
non-metal base as listed below. This can be done as
follows:
– Screws in the holes provided
– Rivets in the holes provided
– Nails through the holes
– Staples through the plastic of the tabs
– Insertion in the spacer
The tabs can also be bent by 90°.
Slide the MDS
into the mounting
bracket.
It is locked
in place by means
of the stop knobs
in the mounting
bracket. Data memory
Spacer
Mounting bracket
Assembly:
The MDS is pushed into the moun-
ting bracket. The tabs are then bent
by 90° and inserted in the spacer.
Position the mounting bracket so
that it covers the MDS as shown in
the figure. It is automatically locked
into place.
MDS with mounting bracket MDS with mounting bracket and spacer
(assembled)
SIEMENS
Material: PA 6
Figure 4-6 Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611 (for use with the MDS E600, see
note in Figure 4-2)
Mobile Data Memories
4-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
20 mm
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
b
a
h
Standard values: a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm
Mounting on metal
Flush mounting in metal
Figure 4-7 Metal-free space for MDS E611
Note
Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the
field data. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws. This has no sub-
stantial effect on the range.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
4.4 MDS E623
The MDS E623 was constructed for tool coding in accordance with
DIN 69873. It can be used everywhere where small data carriers and precise
positioning are required (e.g., tool identification).
Figure 4-8 MDS E623
Table 4-9 Ordering data for MDS E623
Order Number
MDS E623 mobile data memory 6GT2 300-0CD00
Table 4-10 Technical data of the MDS E623
Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM,
752 bytes for use as desired
Memory organization Access as desired
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Minimum write cycles 200 000
Typical write cycles 1 000 000
Data retention time (at < +40 °C) > 10 years
Read/write distances See field data
Direction dependent No
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Mounting of the MDS Adhesive1;
e.g. Araldit AW 2101/HW2951 or 2021;
UHU-Plus endfest 300
Protection rating
In accordance with EN 60529
In accordance with DIN 40050
(part 9)
IP67
IPx9K (steamer: 150 mm;
10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C)
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-13
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 4-10 Technical data of the MDS E623
Physical layout Molded, shock-resistant plastic
Color Black
Material Epoxy resin
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
(dimensions and tolerances in accor-
dance with DIN 69873)
∅10 x 4.5
(chamfer on the underside 0.5 x 45°)
Ambient temperature
during operation
during transportation and storage
–25 °C to +85 °C
–40 °C to +100 °C
Weight, approximate 4 g
1 The processing specifications of the manufacturer must be adhered to.
Table 4-11 Field data MDS E623
SIM 70 ANT 0 SLG 75 ANT 18 SLG 75 ANT 12
Metal-free installation (static)
Working distance (Sa)0 to 6 mm 0 to 6 mm 0 to 4 mm
Transmission window
(Ld)
4 mm
(average devia-
tion
±2 mm)
4 mm
(average devia-
tion
±2 mm)
8 mm
(average devia-
tion
±4 mm)
Limit distance (Sg)6 mm 6 mm 5 mm
Flush mounting in metal (static)
Working distance (Sa)0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3 mm
Transmission window
(Ld)
4 mm
(average devia-
tion
±1.5 mm)
4 mm
(average devia-
tion
±1.5 mm)
4 mm
(average devia-
tion
±2 mm)
Limit distance (Sg)4 mm 4 mm 4 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS
> 30 mm > 30 mm > 20 mm
Note
The MDS E623 is only designed for static operation.
Field data
Mobile Data Memories
4-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Data memory
Mounting on metal
MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metalMDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal
SIEMENS
MDS E623
Figure 4-9 Mounting on metal: MDS E623
Flush mounting in metal
Metal
Data memory
MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal.
SIEMENS
MDS E623
Figure 4-10 Metal-free space for MDS E623
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-15
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
d
1
b1
t1t2
b2
d
2
Z
MDS E623 Metal
Antenna side
(active surface)
Figure 4-11 Dimensions and installation space for MDS E623
Table 4-12 Dimensions of MDS E623/installation space in accordance with
DIN 69873
MDS E623 Installation space
b10.5 x 45°b20.3 x 45° or
R 0.3
d110 -0.04
-0.13 d210 +0.09
0
t14,5 -0
-0.1 t24,6 +0.2
0
The MDS may not protrude out of the receptacle hole. It must be flush with
the outside contours. Follow the installation instructions for the MDS and
take into account the particular conditions of your project (e.g., scope speed,
temperature and use of cooling lubricant).
Bore mounting opening.
The surface to which adhesive will be applied must be dry and free of
dust, grease, stripping agents and other soil.
Apply adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Press MDS E623 in by hand. Antenna side to outside (see Figure 4-11).
Remove extra adhesive.
Allow to harden in accordance with the instructions of the adhesive
manufacturer.
Mounting the
MDS E623 flush in
metal with tools
Mounting with
adhesive
Mobile Data Memories
4-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Z
Figure 4-12 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft
Z
Figure 4-13 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft
Examples of
mounting
Mobile Data Memories
4-17
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
4.5 MDS E624
Figure 4-14 MDS E624
Table 4-13 Ordering data for MDS E624
Order Number
MDS E624 mobile data memory
with 752-byte EEPROM
6GT2 300-0CE00
Table 4-14 Technical data of the MDS E624
Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as de-
sired
Memory organization Access as desired
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Minimum write cycles 200 000
Typical write cycles 1 000 000
Data retention time (at < +40 °C) > 10 years
Read/write distances See field data
Direction dependent No
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/M3 screw
Tightening torque at +20°C≤ 1 Nm
Protection rating
In accordance with EN 60529
In accordance with DIN 40050
(part 9)
IP67
IPx9K (steamer: 150 mm;
10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C)
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 4-14 Technical data of the MDS E624
Physical layout
Color
Material
Molded, shock-resistant plastic
Black
Epoxy resin
Dimensions (DxH) in mm 27 x 4
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +125 °C
–40 °C to +150 °C
Weight, approximate 5 g
Table 4-15 Field data of MDS E624
SLG 75
ANT 18
SLG 75
ANT 1
SLG 75
ANT 4
SLG 72 SLG 75
ANT 30
SLA 71
Working
distance (Sa)
0 to 8 mm 0 to 25 mm 0 to 25 mm 0 to 30 mm 0 to 18 mm 0 to 25 mm
Limit distance (Sg)15 mm 40 mm 35 mm 40 mm 24 mm 40 mm
Transmission
window (L)
12 mm (Ld)38 mm (Ld)200 mm (Ld)60 mm (Lx)1
40 mm (Ly)1
14 mm (Ld)38 mm (Ld)
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 50 mm > 250 mm > 250 mm > 250 mm > 60 mm > 250 mm
1 For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
∅270.2
40.2
∅6
∅3.5
Figure 4-15 Dimensions of MDS E624
Field data
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-19
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h ≥ 20 mm
Mounting on metal
Flush mounting in metal
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
a ≥ 20 mm
SIEMENS
MDS E624
SIEMENS
MDS E624
h ≥ 20 mm
Figure 4-16 Metal-free space for MDS E624
Note
Underranging the standard values a and h will significantly reduce the field
data. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws (i.e. M3 countersunk
screws). This has no substantial effect on the range.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Mobile Data Memories
5-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5
5-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5.1 Introduction
The SLGs/SLAs provide inductive communication with the mobile data me-
mories (i.e. MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces (i.e. ASMs).
Various SLG/SLA models – for short, medium and long distances to the MDS
– are available to meet customer requirements.
The SLG/SLA executes commands received from the interface. These com-
mands for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodula-
tor circuit.
Communication between MDS and SLG/SLA takes place via inductive alter-
nating fields.
The volume of data that can be transmitted between the SLG/SLA and MDS
depends on the following:
The speed at which the MDS moves through the SLG/SLA’s transmission
window
The length of the transmission window
Table 5-1 Overview table of SLG/SLA
SLG Type Working
distance Sa
(depending
on MDS)
Limit
distance Sg
Temperature
range
(during opera-
tion)
Circuit di-
mensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Antenna di-
mensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Protection
rating
SLG 72 0 to 70 mm 100 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 --- IP65
SLG 75 ANT 1 0 to 70 mm 100 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 20 IP65
SLG 75 ANT 4 0 to 70 mm 100 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 320 x 80 x 30 IP65
SLG 75 ANT 12 0 to 4 mm 5 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 ∅ M12 x 40 IP65
SLG 75 ANT 18 0 to 8 mm 15 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 ∅ M18 x 50 IP65
SLG 75 ANT 30 0 to 18 mm 24 mm –25 to +70 °C160 x 80 x 40 ∅ M30 x 58 IP65
SLA 71 0 to 70 mm 100 mm –25 to +70 °C --- 75 x 75 x 20 IP65
Definition of IP65:
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e. dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– Protection against water jet
Definition of IP67:
– Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof)
– Total protection again accidental touch
– Protection against water under specified pressure and time conditions
Application area
Layout and
functions
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5.2 SLG 72
The SLG 72 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. Due to
the larger dimensions of the antenna, the SLG 72 creates a greater field than
the SLG 75 ANT 1. In dynamic operation greater volumes of data can be
read/written by the MDS (see Section 3.3).
Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 72
Table 5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 72
Read/write device SLG 72 6GT2 301-0CA00
SLG connector and plug-in line See Section 3.7
Table 5-3 Technical data of the SLG 72
Inductive interface to MDS
Max. SLG-MDS read/write distances 100 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Serial interface to ASM RS 422
Data transmission speed 19200 Baud
Max. ASM - SLG cable length
(with 24 V DC and
a conductor cross-section of 0.2 mm2)
120 m
Max. data cable length. See cable configuration
in Table 3-14.
1000 m
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 5-3 Technical data of the SLG 72
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Brief switch-on current
Operation (at 24 V)
Max. of 700 mA
180 mA (typical)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
Without connector (W x H x D)
Color
Material
Connector
160 x 80 x 40
Anthracite
Polyamide 12
6-pin SLG connector in accor-
dance with DIN 43651
Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529
Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, type II
Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
IP65
30 g1
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)1
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)1
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque at room temperature
2 M5 screws
≤ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to + 70 °C
–40 °C to + 85 °C
Weight (approx.) 550 g
1Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must
not occur continuously.
The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-4 Field data of SLG 72
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Transmission window
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
0 to 70 mm
100 mm
Depends on MDS
Da > 800 mm
Db > 800 mm
Field data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Sg
Side view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
SLG 72
M
Standard configuration: longitudinal x-axis (Lx)70
Lx, (Sa, min) 1
Sa
Sa
Sa
Sa
1 At Sa, min, the transmission window may increase.
Lx, (Sa, min) 1
Ly, (Sa, max) = LyLy, (Sa, max) = Ly
Figure 5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 72
Metal
h = Physical height of SLG
h
b
Metal
a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm
b
a
a
Figure 5-3 Metal-free space of SLG 72
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 72
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG72
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Da
Db
SLG 72SLG 72
SLG 72
Da ≥ 800 mm
Db ≥ 800 mm
X
Y
X
Y
X
Y
Figure 5-4 Distance D: SLG 72
90
5,5
5
5
80 40
X
Y
160
70
25
Figure 5-5 Dimensioned drawing SLG 72
FCC information
Definition of
the distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5.3 SLG 75
The SLG 75 ANT is a read/write device in the middle of the performance
range. It can only be used with ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18 and
ANT 30. The antennas can be very easily positioned for any application.
The cable between the antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m long. The length
cannot be changed.
The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side.
The SLG 75 can be operated at the following interfaces:
ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 424, ASM 450, ASM 452, ASM 454, ASM 470,
ASM 473 and ASM 475.
Figure 5-6 Read/write device SLG 75
ANT 1
Figure 5-7 ANT 1 for SLG 75
The ANT 1 is an antenna in the middle of the performance range which is
very useful in production plants and assembly lines because of its easily han-
dled housing.
The antenna’s dimensions make it possible to read/write large volumes of
data from/to the MDS during operation. The antenna cable can be connected
on the SLG side.
Application
area SLG 75
Areas of
application
of the antennas
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ANT 4
Figure 5-8 ANT 4 for SLG 75
The ANT 4 was specially conceived for use in manufacturing plans and assem-
bly lines.
Due to its wide transmission area, the antenna can be used every where high
speeds are required. The cable length between the antenna and the evaluating
processor unit is 1 m and is connected to the electronics side.
ANT 12
Figure 5-9 ANT 12 for the SLG 75
The ANT 12 is intended primarily for tool identification. The very small size of
the antenna permits very accurate positioning using the plastic nuts included
with it. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. Data carrier com-
munication is only possible with the MDS E623 (tool pill) in static mode.
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ANT 18
Figure 5-10 ANT 18 for the SLG 75
The ANT 18 was designed primarily for use in small assembly lines. The small,
compact dimensions of the antenna with its two plastic nuts (included with the
product) make it easy to position for any application. The antenna cable can be
connected on the SLG side. Data carrier communication is only possible with
the MDS E624 in static mode.
ANT 30
Figure 5-11 ANT 30 for the SLG 75
The ANT 30 was designed primarily for use in small assembly lines. The
maximum read/write range is approximately 60% greater than the ANT 18.
The compact dimensions of antenna with its two plastic nuts (included with
the product) make it very easy to position for any application. The antenna
cable can be connected on the SLG side. Data carrier communication is only
possible with the MDS E624 in static mode.
Table 5-5 Ordering data for the SLG 75 and ANT xx
SLG 75 write/read device
with RS 422 serial interface
The antenna is not included with the
SLG 75 and must be ordered separately.
6GT2 398-1AF00
Antennas:
ANT 1 75 x 75 x 20 (L x W x H)
ANT 4 320 x 80 x 30 (L x W x H)
ANT 4 320 x 80 x 30 (L x W x H)
ANT 12 M12 x 1.0 x 40 (∅ x wght x L)
ANT 18 M18 x 1.0 x 55 (∅ x wght x L)
ANT 30 M30 x 1.5 x 58 (∅ x wght x L)
6GT2 398-1CB00
6GT2 398-1CE00
6GT2 398-1CE00-0AX01
6GT2 398-1CC00
6GT2 398-1CA00
6GT2 398-1CD00
SLG connector and plug-in line See Section 3.7
1 with antenna cable with hose
Ordering data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 5-6 Technical data of the SLG 75
Read/write device SLG 75
Inductive interface to MDS
ANT-MDS read/write distances See field data
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Serial interface to ASM RS 422
Data transmission speed 19200 Baud
Max. ASM - SLG cable length
(with 24 V DC and a conductor cross-sec-
tion of 0.2 mm2)
120 m
Max. data cable length. See cable configu-
ration in Table 3-14.
1000 m
MDS addressing
command
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Switch-on current (brief)
Operation (at 24 V DC)
Max. of 700 mA
180 mA (typical)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
Electronics w/o connectors (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40
Color
Material
Connector
Data
Anthracite
Plastic (PA 12)
6-pin SLG connector in accordance with
DIN 43651 (pin, device side)
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
Vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
IP65
30 g1
1 g (3 to 200 Hz)1
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)1
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque at room temperature
2 M5 screws
≤ 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to + 70 °C
–40 °C to + 85 °C
Weight (approx.) 520 g
Certification CE, UL/CSA, FCC
1Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not
occur continuously.
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 5-7 Technical data of the antennas
Antenna ANT 1 ANT 4 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30
Write/read distance, max.
ANT-MDS (Sg).
100 mm 100 mm 5 mm 15 mm 24 mm
Housing dimensions in mm 75 x 75 x 20
(L x W x H)
320 x 80 x 30
(L x W x H)
M12 x 1.0 x 40
(∅ x wght x L)
M18 x 1.0 x 55
(∅ x wght x L)
M30 x 1.5 x 58
(∅ x wght x L)
Color Anthracite Pastel turquoise
Material Plastic (PA 12) Plastic
Crastin
Connector 4-pin
pin, antenna side
Antenna line length 3 m 1 m 3 m
Protection rating in accor-
dance with EN 60529
IP67 IP67 (front)
Vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
50 g1
20 g (3 to 500 Hz)1
Mounting of antenna 2 M5 screws 2 plastic nuts
M12 x 1.0
2 plastic nuts
M18 x 1.0
2 plastic nuts
M30 x 1.5
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation
and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Weight (approx.) 80 g 950 g 45 g 120 g 150 g
1Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously.
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 5-8 Cable specification of the ANT 12 antenna
Type of line Coaxial transmission line 50 Ω
suitable for dragchain
Sheath PUR
External diameter 5.2 mm
Mechanical stability
Bending radius
– one-time
– repeated
Dragchain
≥ 5 x External diameter
≥ 15 x External diameter
≥ 2 x 106 Cycles
Ambient temperature during operation
– with fixed wiring
– with flexible wiring
–30 °C to +70 °C
–5 °C to +50 °C
Approval UL (in accordance with style 1354)
Table 5-9 Field data of the SLG 75 with antenna
SLG 75 ANT 1 ANT 4 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30
Working distance (Sa)0 to 70 mm 0 to 70 mm 0 to 4 mm 0 to 8 mm 0 to 18 mm
Limit distance (Sg)100 mm 100 mm 5 mm 15 mm 24 mm
Diameter of the transmis-
sion window (Ld)
Depends on
MDS
Depends on
MDS
8 mm Depends on
MDS
14 mm
Minimum distance from
SLG to SLG (D) 800 mm > 800 mm 80 mm 125 mm 200 mm
Field data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-13
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Transmission window:
The antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field to ensure relia-
ble data transfer.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
SgSide view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
Sa
1 The transmission window may
be larger at Sa, min.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa, min) 1
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa,max) = Ld
Figure 5-12 Transmission window of the ANT 1
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Sg
Side view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
Sa
1 The transmission window may be larger at Sa, min.
L (Sa,min) 1
L (Sa,max) = Ld
Figure 5-13 Transmission window of the ANT 4
Transmission
window
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Ld
Top view
sg
sa
Side view
Ld
Transmission window
Figure 5-14 Transmission window of the ANT 12
Ld
Top view
Ld
sg
sa
Side view 1 The transmission window may
be larger at Sa, min.
L (Sa, min) 1
Figure 5-15 Transmission window of the ANT 18
Ld
Top view
sg
sa
Side view
Ld
Transmission window
Figure 5-16 Transmission window of the ANT 30
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-15
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal-free space with flush mounting
a = 40 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 20 mm (non-metallic base)
Figure 5-17 Metal-free space for the ANT 1
Metal-free space with flush mounting
a = 40 mm
Metal a
a
a
a
Figure 5-18 Metal-free space for the ANT 4
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Note:
Flush installation in metal reduces the limit
and working distance.
Top view Side view
MOBYE
ANT 12
Figure 5-19 Metal-free space for the ANT 12
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
aMOBY E
ANT 18
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
Metal-free space with flush
installation
Note:
The limit and working distances are
reduced when the metal-free space is
not adhered to.
10
10
ANT 18
Figure 5-20 Metal-free space for the ANT 18
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
MOBYE
ANT 30
20
Side view
20
20
Top view
Figure 5-21 Metal-free space for the ANT 30
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-17
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 75
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG75
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC information
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Da
Db
ANT 1ANT 1
ANT 1
Da ≥ 800 mm
Db ≥ 800 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted
directly next to each other.
Figure 5-22 Distance D: ANT 1
Da ≥ 800 mm
Db ≥ 800 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted
directly next to each other.
ANT 4
Da
Db
ANT 4
ANT 4ANT 4
Figure 5-23 Distance D: ANT 4
Da 80 mm
Db 80 mm
The SLG electronics can be
mounted directly next to each other.
Db
Da
Figure 5-24 Distance D: ANT 12
Definition of
the Distance D
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-19
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Da ≥ 125 mm
Db ≥ 125 mm
The SLG electronics can be
mounted directly next to each other.
Db
Da
Figure 5-25 Distance D: ANT 18
Da 200 mm
Db 200 mm
The SLG electronics can be
mounted directly next to each other.
Db
Da
Figure 5-26 Distance D: ANT 30
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5,5
5
5
80 40
160
25
Figure 5-27 Dimensioned drawing of SLG 75
5 20
75
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 3 m
ANT 1 can be connected
on electronics side
Figure 5-28 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 1
Minimum
bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable
length 1 m
ANT 4 can be
connected on
electronics side
5
320
80
30
5
Figure 5-29 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 4
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-21
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
40
M12
Fine thread
Gradient 1.0
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 3 m
ANT 12 can be connected
on electronics side
Antenna
head
Antenna
side
Side view
of the antenna
head
17
MOBY E
ANT 12
Figure 5-30 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 12
55
M18
Fine thread
Gradient 1.0
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 3 m
ANT 18 can be connected
on electronics side
Antenna
head
Antenna
side
Side view
of the antenna
head
24
MOBY E
ANT 18
Figure 5-31 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 18
58
M30
Fine thread
incline: 1.5
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 3 m
ANT 30 can be
connected on electronics side
Antenna
head
Antenna
side
Side view
of the antenna
head
43
MOBY E
ANT 30
Figure 5-32 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 30
Note
The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m. The
length cannot be changed.
Caution
The antenna must not be removed in an energized state.
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-22 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Notes on mounting for split toroidal cores
Connect the 2 split toroidal cores included with the SLG 75 (order number
6GT2 398-1AF00) just behind the ASM plug connector if you are using stan-
dard SLG stub lines (see table 5-10) or cables which have made youself.
1. Close the plastic ferrite shells over the connecting cable.
2. Secure the ferrite shells using a cable binder to prevent them slipping (see
Figure 5-33)
Table 5-10 Standard connecting cables which will take split toroidal cores
Connecting cables Ordering number
SLG 75 – ASM 400/424/454 6GT2 091-0A...1
6GT2 091-2A...1
SLG 75 – ASM 410 6GT2 091-0D...1
6GT2 091-2D...1
SLG 75 – ASM 450/452/473 6GT2 091-1C...1
6GT2 091-2C...1
SLG 75 – ASM 470/475 6GT2 091-0E...1
6GT2 091-2E...1
1 For cable lengths, see chap. 3.7.4.
ASM connector
Split toroidal cores
Cable binder
Figure 5-33 ASM 450 connecting cables with split toroidal cores (example)
Note
If your cables have diameters greater than 8 mm, please contact Customer
Support:
Telephone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Cores to the
SLG 75
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-23
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Notes on mounting for round cores
It may be necessary to install the included round cores on the antenna lines
(ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) under certain conditions:
When several antennas are mounted close together
When several antennas interfere with each other due to coupling via me-
tallic structures (see chap. 3.4.3)
In this case, the round cores must be installed as shown in figure 5-34 direct-
ly behind the plug connector of the antenna line.
The cores prevent common-mode currents, among others, and ensure inter-
ference-free operation.
Antenna line
Round cores
SLG 75
Figure 5-34 Antenna line with round cores
Note
When serveral SLG 75s are connected to one ASM, the antenna cables
(ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) of the individual SLGs must be
installed separately from each other to prevent interference in communica-
tion.
Bundled installation of the antenna cables may cause communication prob-
lems.
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-24 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
5.4 SLA 71
The SLA 71 is a read/write antenna in the middle of the performance range.
It permits greater distances to the evaluation unit (ASM).
The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m (max.).
The SLA 71 can be connected to the following: ASM 724 and ASM 754.
Figure 5-35 Read/write antenna SLA 71
Table 5-11 Ordering data for the SLA 71
Read/write antenna SLA 71 6GT2 301-2BB00
Accessories:
Standard connecting cable between
SLA 71 ↔ ASM 724 and ASM 754;
length 5 m (not included with the pro-
duct)
Extension for antenna line
6GT2 391-1AH50 Length 25 m
6GT2 391-1AH50
6GT2 391-1BN25
Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 71
Inductive interface to MDS
Read/write distances (SLG - MDS), max. 100 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Serial interface to ASM RS 422
Data transmission speed 106 kbps
Line length to ASM, max. 55 m
Voltage (only via ASM)
Current consumption at room temperature
12 V DC
160 mA (typical)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 1 x 105 hours
Application
area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-25
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 71
Housing
Dimensions without connecting cable
(L x W x H in mm)
Color
Material
Connector
75 x 75 x 20
Anthracite
Polyamide 12
0.5 m cable with 8-pin M12
connector (pin on device side)
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
Shock in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, type II
Vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
IP67
30 g1
5 g (9 to 200 Hz)1
10 g (200 to 500 Hz)1
Mounting of the SLA 71
Tightening torque at 20 °C
2 M5 screws
≤ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
Weight without connecting cable (approx.) 150 g
1Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must
not occur continuously.
Table 5-13 Field data of SLA 71
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of the transmission window (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D)
10 to 70 mm
100 mm
Depends on MDS
Da > 800 mm
Field data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-26 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
SgSide view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
SLA 71
Sa
1 The transmission window may
be larger at Sa, min.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa, min) 1
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa,max) = Ld
Figure 5-36 Transmission window of the SLA 71
Metal-free space with flush mounting
a = 40 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 20 mm (non-metallic base)
Figure 5-37 Metal-free space for SLA 71
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-27
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SLA 71
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLA71
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Da
Db
SLA 71SLA 71
SLA 71
Da ≥ 800 mm
Db ≥ 800 mm
Figure 5-38 Distance D: SLA 71
Cable length: 0.5 m
5 20
75
Figure 5-39 Dimensioned drawing of SLA 71
FCC information
Definition of
the distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-28 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
6-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Interfaces 6
6-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.1 Introduction
ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY E components (i.e. SLGs/
SLAs and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S 5/S7), PCs
or computers. Up to four SLGs/SLAs can be connected depending on the
interface used.
An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on
a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these
in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has
arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution.
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
type
Interfaces to
PC/computer
Interfaces
to SLG/
SLA
Function
blocks
SLG/
SLA
connec-
tions
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
Temperature
range
(during opera-
tion)
Protec-
tion
Rating
ASM 400 Can be
installed in
S5-115-155U
9-pin sub-
miniature
D socket
FB 250/
230/252
1 per CM
4 per
ASM
0 to +55°C IP00
ASM 410 Can be
installed in
S5-100U/
ET 200U
Can be
connected
via bus
module
2 (multi-
plex)
45 x 135 x 100 0 to +60°C IP20
ASM 424 RS 232
RS 422
9-pin sub-
miniature
D socket
MOBY API 4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55 °C IP40
ASM 450 To
PROFIBUS DP
(screw connec-
tion)
2 5-pin
proximity
switch con-
nectors
FC 46
FB 240
2 (multi-
plex)
134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55°C IP67
ASM 452 PROFIBUS
DPV1
2 5-pin
proximity
switch con-
nectors
FC 45 2 (quasi-
parallel)
134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55°C IP67
ASM 454 PROFIBUS
DPV1
9-pin sub-
miniature
D socket
FC 45 4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55 °C IP40
ASM 456 PROFIBUS
DPV1
2 8-pin
M12
connector
socket
FC 45
FB 45
FC 55
FB 55
2
(parallel)
60 x 210 x 54
resp. 79
0 to +55 °C IP67
ASM 470 Can be instal-
led in S7-300/
ET 200M
Via screw
terminals
FC 47
FB 47
2 (multi-
plex)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60°C IP20
Application area
Layout and
functions
Overview
Interfaces
6-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
type
Protec-
tion
Rating
Temperature
range
(during opera-
tion)
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
SLG/
SLA
connec-
tions
Function
blocks
Interfaces
to SLG/
SLA
Interfaces to
PC/computer
ASM 473 Connectable
to the ET 200X
2 5-pin
proximity
switch con-
nectors
FC 45 187 x 110 x 55 0 to +55°C IP67
ASM 475 Can be instal-
led in S7-300/
ET 200M
Via screw
terminals
FC 45 2
(parallel)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60°C IP20
ASM 724 RS 232/RS 422
(9-pin
subminiature D
socket)
9-pin sub-
miniature
D socket
MOBY API 4 x SLA
(multi-
plex)
205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 °C IP40
ASM 754 PROFIBUS
DPV1
(9-pin
subminiature D
socket)
9-pin sub-
miniature
D socket
FC 45 4 x SLA
(multi-
plex)
205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 °C IP40
SIM 7x RS 232/RS 422
(15-pin
subminiature D
connector)
Integrated 3964R
driver
MOBY API
C-lib
--- 160 x 80 x 40
(without ext.
ANT)
-25 to +70 °C IP67
(with
special
connec-
tor)
Interfaces
6-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.2 ASM 400
6.2.1 Overview
ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the follo-
wing SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers.
S5-115U/F (all CPUs)
S5-135 U/F (all CPUs)
S5-155U/H (all CPUs)
The ASM 400 interface modules consist of the basic module in double-height
Eurocard format and the CM 422 channel module. The basic module can be
configured with one to four channel modules. Mixed configuration is not per-
mitted.
The ASM 400 interface module with the CM 422 works in the SIMATIC S5
I/O area. A maximum of 32 channel modules can be used with the FB 250
function block in one SIMATIC (this corresponds to eight four-channel inter-
face modules). When the FB 252 is used, the maximum number of channel
submodules is increased from 32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models
can be processed via the FBs. The user addresses the data on the MDS via a
command table in the data block. The user addresses user data via absolute
addresses.
Note
To achieve optimal transmission times, the length of the block should not
exceed 150 bytes per command.
Application area
Configuration and
functions
Interfaces
6-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SLG SLG SLG SLG
ASM 400
with channel submodule
CM 422
MDS MDSMDS MDS
Figure 6-1 Configurator of ASM 400
Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors.
Cycle time and type of programmable controller
Software used (i.e. FB 250)
Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps.
The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called,
the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM.
The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called
the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred
from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message.
Communication
between ASM 400
and user program
Interfaces
6-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-2 Ordering data for the ASM 400
Order No.
ASM 400 interface
consisting of a basic module and
CM 422 channel submodule
Basic module with connection to STG,
with 4 slide-in slots for CM 422 channel
module, without channel module
CM 422 channel module
6GT2 002-0AA00
6GT2 002-0AB00
Connector,
ASM side, 9-pin subminiature D
connector (pins) with screw-type terminal
for plug-in line between an ASM 400 and
SLG/STG
1 unit
1 pack (10 units)
6GT2 090-0BB00
6GT2 090-0BB10
Connector,
2-pin connector with screw-type terminal
for plug-in line up to 1.5 mm in diameter
for 24 V DC connection (included with
the ASM 400)
MOBY software1
with FB230/240/250
Plug-in lines and accessories
6GT2 090-0NA00
6GT2 080-2AA10
See Section 3.7
Description of ASM 400/401
German
English
Description FB 250 for ASM 400
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See Section 7.1
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-3 Technical data of the ASM 400
Channel module CM 422
Serial interface to SLG
Connector
Max. interface/line length
SLG which can be connected
RS 422
9-pin subminiature D socket
RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type
1 SLG per CM
Software functions
Programming With STEP 5 function block FB 250
Commands Read data, write data, initialize MDS
Access directly via addresses
Supply voltage 5/24 V DC via internal bus
Interfaces ASM 400
Interfaces for CM/SLG
ASM 400 (max.)
Interface to STG 4F
Interface for 24 V DC
4 CM 422
RS 422, 9-pin subminiature D socket
2-pin connector (included)
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Perm. range
Internal (at 5 V)
External (at 24 V)
5/24 V DC
4.75 to 5.25 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Max. current consumption
internal (at 5 V)
External (at 24 V)
Fine-wire fuse
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
M 1.25 A/250 V
370 mA
490 mA
610 mA
730 mA
400 mA
800 mA
1200 mA
1600 mA
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and sto-
rage
Rel. humidity at 25 ° C
Space requirements
Approximate weight
ASM 400
CM 422
0 to +55 °C
–20 to +70 °C
< 95 %
1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm)
0.44 kg
0.1 kg
Technical data
Interfaces
6-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 pro-
gram and the ASM 400 interface module.
FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers.”
115U/F
135U-R/S
155U/H
FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with
FB 250.
Primary functions of FB 250
Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM
All communication with the ASM via command data exchange
Error handling: command repetition;
Preparation of errors for the user
Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command
Reading and writing with a user command
Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one
command.
Control of PLC cycle load via the user
Data transmission between FB and MDS can be subdivided into three phases.
Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameter
Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS
Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface
When the P address area is available, FB 252 also supports operation of the
ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area.
Function block
FB 250
Interfaces
6-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.2.2 Hardware Description
3 LEDs per channel:
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
Connector for the service and test device (STG)
+ 24 V
GND
9-pin subminiature D socket
Channel module
No. 1
Channel module
No. 2
Channel module
No. 3
Channel module
No. 4
24 V connector
(this connector is
included with the ASM)
Connector for the SLG
9-pin subminiature D
connector with
screw-type attachment
Order no.: 6GT2090-0BB00
Connector assignment to
Pin Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
+ Sending
+Receiving
Not used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
Not used
Housing Cable shield
the SLG and STG
Metal front panel
Screws for attaching
the channel module to
the basic module for
EMC operation
Figure 6-2 Connectors and their assignment for the ASM 400
Connectors and
their assignment
Interfaces
6-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
x x
Switch 3
Switch 1 Switch 2
Switch 4
Connector for
SIMATIC bus
ON = 1
OFF = 0
ON = 1OFF = 0
18 8 1
1
1 4
2
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
X20
1 and 2 must
always be
jumped in the
case of X20
Figure 6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for the ASM 400
S4 = setting the addressing mode
S2 = setting the page frame number
S3 = setting the module address (linear addressing with PESP)
S1 = address setting without PESP
Table 6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252
ASM 400 switch setting FB 250
parameterization
FB 252
parameterization
Start ad-
dress of
ASM
Switch
S3
4 3 2 1
Switch
S4
2 1
ADR KAN* QADR KAN
00 0 0 0 0 1 01 - 4
16 0 0 0 1 This set-
i f
16 (Corres-
ponds to
32 0 0 1 0 ting of
switch 4 32 pon
d
s
to
channel
48 0 0 1 1
switch 4
must al-
b
Not 48
channel
module 1
to 4)
64 0 1 0 0 ways be
used
Not
available 64 to
4)
80 0 1 0 1
used
when the
dl i
80
96 0 1 1 0 module is
o
p
erated 96
112 0 1 1 1
operated
in stan-
dd
112
128 1 0 0 0 dard
mode. 128 1 - 4 128
144 1 0 0 1
mode
.
144 (Corres-
ponds to
144
160 1 0 1 0 160 pon
d
s
to
channel 160
176 1 0 1 1 176
channel
module 1
to 4)
176
192 1 1 0 0 192 to
4)
192
208 1 1 0 1 208 208
224 1 1 1 0 224 224
240 1 1 1 1 240 240
Switches and
plug-in jumpers
Address
settings
Interfaces
6-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
EPROM
CPU
80C32
Plug-in jumper X20
Hybrid for
serial interface
X21 removed
CM422 for ASM 400
Plug-in jumper X20:
Removed:
normal mode
Inserted:
test mode; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when mal-
functions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during
commissioning.
Figure 6-4 Settings on the channel module
Settings on the
channel module
Interfaces
6-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-5 Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U)
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-6 Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U)
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-7 Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LA
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LB
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-1 (S5-115U)
Interfaces
6-13
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-8 Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U)
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-9 Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U)
MOBY interface modules ASM 400 cannot be plugged in.
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
Slot designation
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
AS 314, AS 310, IM 317
IM 307 or IM 317
(only as of ER 701-3LA13)
Figure 6-10 Module rack ER 701-3 (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-2 (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-3 (S5-115U)
Module rack
ER 700-0;
Rack ER 701-1 and
ER 701-2
Module rack
ER 701-3
Interfaces
6-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Slot designation
Figure 6-11 Central controller S5-135U/ -155U
MOBY interface module
ASM 400
Slot designation
Figure 6-12 Central controller S5-155U/-155H
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Slot designation
Interface 312-3
Interface 310 or 314
Figure 6-13 Expansion unit EG S5-183U for S5-135U/-155U
Central controller
S5-135U/ -155U
Central controller
S5-155U/ -155H
Expansion unit
EG S5-183U
Interfaces
6-15
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Slot designation
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-14 Expansion unit EG S5-184U for S5-135U/-155U
MOBY interface module
ASM 400
Slot designation
Interface 314
Figure 6-15 Expansion unit EG S5-185U for S5-135U/-155U/-155H
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Interface 312-5
Slot designation
Figure 6-16 Expansion unit EG S5-187U for S5-135U/-155U
Expansion unit
EG S5-184U
Expansion unit
EG S5-185U
Expansion unit
EG S5-187U
Interfaces
6-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.3 ASM 410
The ASM 410 interface can be used in the SIMATIC with the following:
S5-90U (max. 2)
S5-95U (max. 4)
S5-100U (max. 8)
ET 100U (max. 2)
ET 200U (max. 4)
This ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and
the STG service test device. Compatibility with all MOBY components is
ensured.
LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interference-
immune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY interface
to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are fet-
ched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/
PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation,
one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute
addresses.
STG
SLG SLG
MDS
SIEMENS SIEMENS
Bus module of
PLC S5-100U with
ASM 410
MDS
Figure 6-17 Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5
Application
area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-17
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-5 Ordering data for the ASM 410
Order No.
ASM 410 interface
SIMATIC S5, bus module
Screw-type connection
Crimp connection, with crimp contacts,
increased EMC resistance
Plug-in lines and accessories
6GT2 002-0BA00
6ES5 700-8MA11
6ES5 700-8MA22
See Section 3.7
Description - ASM 410
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-6 Technical data of the ASM 410
Serial interface to the SLG
Max. connection
RS 422
2 SLGs can be connected via a se
p
arate
Max
.
connection
Line length/type, max.
2 SLGs can be connected via a separate
bus module
1000 m/RS 422, depending on the SLG
Line length/t
y
pe
,
ma
x.
SLG which can be connected
1000 m/RS 422
,
depending on the SLG
and cable type
SLG which can be connected
Static operation 2 SLG 7x
p
Dynamic operation
Interface to STG
1 SLG 7x
RS 422, 9
-
pin subminiature D connector
Interface to STG
Interface for 24 V DC
RS 422
,
9
-
pin subminiature D connector
is fed via a separate bus module
Software functions
Pi
With STEP 5 di tl i i
Programming With STEP 5 directly via process image
(PIO/PII); no function block required;
Commands
(); q;
5 bytes processed per command
Select channel 1 or 2 read MDS write
C
omman
d
s
S
e
l
ec
t
c
h
anne
l 1
or
2
,
rea
d MDS
,
wr
it
e
MDS, initialize MDS, etc.
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%)
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Internal (at 5 V) typical
20 to 60 mA
Internal (at 5 V) typical
20 to 60 mA
(20 mA = long cycle time)
(
60 mA = short c
y
cle time
)
max.
External (at 24 V DC)
(60 mA = short cycle time)
110 mA (PLC in STOP)
External (at 24 V DC)
All SLGs turned off
T i l ti f th SLG
90 mA
S SLG d i ti
Typical power consumption of the SLG
(without SLG)
See SLG description
2.5 W
Cooling Convection cooling
Isolation group
P t ti ti i d ith
C in accordance with VDE 0110
IP20
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
IP20
EN 60529
Mech. stress IEC 68-2-27
Ambient temperature
During operation
Hi l i lli f SIMATIC
0 60 °C
Horizontal installation of SIMATIC
Vertical installation of SIMATIC
0 to +60 °C
0 to +40
°
C
V
ert
i
ca
l i
nsta
ll
at
i
on
o
f SIMATIC
D
u
rin
g t
r
a
n
spo
r
tat
i
o
n
a
n
d sto
r
age
0
to
+
40 °C
–2
5 to
+
70
°
C
During transportation and storage
Weight (approx.)
–
25 to +70 C
0.25 kg
Technical data
Interfaces
6-19
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The PLC S5-90U has a maximum of four slots available for additional modu-
les. Up to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module.
ASM 410 in PLC S5-95U can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0
to 7. Up to four modules can be used on one PLC.
Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used.
The ASM 410 in the S5-100U PLC can only be operated on slots 0 to 7. Up
to eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slot-
oriented addressing.
S5-100U
012345 678
64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120
to
71 to
79 to
87 to
95 to
103 to
111 to
119 to
127
Slot number
Address assignment
Free slots for additional
digital modules
Slots in the
PLC S5-90U
Slots in PLC
S5-95U
Slot on the
S5-100U PLC
Interfaces
6-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When
parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module
must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies
eight input bytes and eight output bytes (= 16 bytes). Since a maximum of
32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the main control-
ler, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted. When other modu-
les are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410, only one module can
be connected.
On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the
PLC (P, Q, IM3 and IM4).
C
P
U
ET 100U
Central controller:S5Ć135 U
S5Ć155 U
ET 100U
max. 32 ET 100U
Cable length max.
3000 m max. 2 ASM 410 per ET 100U
SIMATIC
DI DO DO
S5Ć115 U
ASM 410
Figure 6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U
The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions.
The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in “slow
mode”. See ET 200U manual for how to set “slow mode”.
The “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410. The
ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”.
Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or
other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used.
Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply.
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 100U
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 200U
Interfaces
6-21
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for
the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus
module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA22).
2 A
3 A
1 A
B1
B2
B3
MOBYE
6GT2 002-0BA00
123456
5
1
6
9
STG
123
LEDs
Mode
8
9
6
res.
0
2
4
68A
C
E
A
B
Interface module
ANW
Active
Error
1.SLG
2.SLG
Power
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
normal
ECC
Test+ECC
INIT norm
INIT ECC
res.
res.
Test mode.
1.SLG
2.SLG
F
TEST
or.
Ventilation slits of the adapter cap-
sule. Make sure that the ventilation
slits are not covered during opera-
tion. Forced ventilation of the module
is not necessary.
Label insert;
short texts in English are on the
back.
Status and error LEDs
Operating mode selection switch
Connector for serial S5 bus
9-pin subminiature D connector for
STG with stub line 6GT2 091-0B...
(screw-type attachment)
Coding pin (not visible; on back of
module) in position “h” (i.e. analog
module)
10-pin connector for bus module
(24 V supply; SLG connection)
Figure 6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements
Physical layout
Interfaces
6-22 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-7 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410
No. Color Meaning
1 A Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the hard-
ware of the module is defective.
2 A Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or
mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the
presence check is enabled.
3 A Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected
the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when
presence check is being used.
B1 Green B1 = 1. SLG is in operation
Note:
Only one of the B1 or B2 LEDs can be on at once. If both LEDs
are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B2 Green B2 = 2. SLG is in operation
Note:
Only one of the B1 or B2 LEDs can be on at once. If both LEDs
are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B3 Green B3 = power on
This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The
interface module can be tested with the STG.
The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the
front of the ASM.
Setting the operating mode:
The ASM 410 works with the serial S5 bus; the STG interface is switched
off.
Test mode with the STG:
Message frames from the S5 are no longer processed (not in the case of
MOBY E).
Note
The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation
since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on
MOBY activities.
Setting the
operating mode
Position 0 to 7
Position 8 to F
Interfaces
6-23
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-8 Operating modes for ASM 410
Switch
setting
Short descrip-
tion on
label insert
Meaning
0 normal Normal operation Read and write all MDS types; EEC
driver is enabled.
11ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; The ECC driver is ena-
bled.
2Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation.
The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for com-
munication with the MDS. This helps to pinpoint weak
spots and malfunctions at commissioning.
31Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch
setting 2.
4INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started
via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS
is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted.
51INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same
as switch setting 4.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
81Test of 1st or
2nd SLG
An STG can be connected via the 9-pin subminiature
D connector. You can use this to test the entire hard-
ware.
9 to F Reserved
1 Do not use switch positions 1, 3, 5 and 8 with MOBY E.
Interfaces
6-24 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
B U S M O D U L E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1st SLG
2nd sLG
Plug-in line incl. SLG connector and open end with wire
end ferrules 6GT2 091-0D...2
Color coding3 in the
case of the plug-in line
supplied by Siemens
Ye
Wh
Br
Pi
Gr
Grn
Ye
Wh
Br
Pi
Gr
Grn
Mounting rail
Connecting terminal plate
on the bus module
Cable shield
Shield
+ 24 V
0 V
From the
external
power
supply
max. cable length = 1000 m 1
1 The maximum cable length depends on the connected SLG and on the tolerance of the
external 24V supply.
2 Cable lengths, see Section 3.7.4.
3 Color coding
gn = green = pin 4 on SLG connector; ge= yellow = pin 5 on SLG connector; ws = white = pin 6 on SLG connector;
br = brown = pin 1 on SLG connector; rs = pink = pin 2 on SLG connector; gr = gray = pin 3 on SLG connector
Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410
Wiring of one or
two SLGs
Interfaces
6-25
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.4 ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for the operation of MOBY com-
ponents on the following systems via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1:
All computers and PCs
All controllers
When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available
to the user.
Figure 6-21 ASM 450/452 interface
Data can be accessed directly in the MDS by means of physical addresses
using the ASM 450.
The ASM 450 works with the function block FB 240 (S5) or FC 44 (S7) in
cyclic operation. The description of FC 44 (appendix) must be read by the
SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must read the description of the FC 44
function for the ASM 450.
Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is
only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed
while passing by (i.e. dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time to
switch over the second SLG.
Application
area
ASM 450
Interfaces
6-26 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 452 represents a logical step up from the well known ASM 450 inter-
face module. You can achieve optimum data throughput even with large PROFI-
BUS configurations by using acyclic data exchange on the PROFIBUS DPV1.
The minimum cyclical data load of the ASM 452 on PROFIBUS ensures for the
user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g. DI/DO) will continue to be processed
very quickly.
Up to 2 SLGs can be operated on the ASM 452 in quasi-parallel mode. In quasi-
parallel mode the user can start a command (via the FC 45) in parallel on 2
SLGs although the ASM only has one serial channel. The ASM automatically
accepts multiplex operation between the SLG 1 and SLG 2. The SLG on which
an MDS is currently located is processed. This delays the processing of the se-
cond MDS. It is therefore recommended you only process the MDS statically
when 2 SLGs are connected to it.
The MDS data are accessed by means of the physical addressing of the MDS.
FC 45 is available for this in SIMATIC S7. FC 45 provides the S7 user with an
easy-to-use interface with powerful commands (processing of a complete MDS
with one command, command chaining, S7 data structures via UDTs).
Table 6-9 Ordering data for the ASM 450/452
ASM 450 interface module for PROFIBUS DP
Max. of 2 SLGs connectable
ASM 452 interface module for PROFIBUS
DPV1 max. 2 SLGs connectable
6GT2 002-0EB00
6GT2 002-0EB20
Accessories
Connector for PROFIBUS DP connection
and 24 V supply
Connecting cable ASM 450/452 SLG
length 2 m; Standard: additional lengths
See Section 3.7.4
Opt. connector ASM 450/452 SLG
M12 screw caps
for unused SLG connection
(ASM 450 and ASM 452 only)
1 pack = 10 units
Software MOBY1
with FB 240, FC 44, FC 45, DDB file
Additional accessories for the ASM 450
(network components)
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 090-0BC00
3RX9 802-0AA0
6GT2 080-2AA10
See the SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and
SIMATIC ET 200X manual
Replacement part:
Connector plate; T functionality for
PROFIBUS connection
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Description - ASM 450/FC 44
German
English
French
Description of FC 45 (for ASM 452)
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See Section 7.1
ASM 452
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-27
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-10 Technical data of the ASM 450/452
ASM 450 ASM 452
Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DPV1
Procedure after
Connection
EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS
PG 11 screw connection
PROFIBUS and power supply connectors are not included.
Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps
(automatic recognition)
Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words (cyclic)/
240 bytes (acyclic)
Serial interface to SLG
Connector 2 coupling connectors (M12)
Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG
(2 m = standard length, other cables made: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m)
SLG which can be connected 2 SLG 7x (multiplex operation) 2x SLG 7x (quasi-parallel opera-
tion)
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7
FB 240
FC 44
–
FC 45
MDS addressing
Commands
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
max. 180 mA; typ. 130 mA
(without SLG, DO not loaded)
Technical data
Interfaces
6-28 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-10 Technical data of the ASM 450/452
ASM 452ASM 450
Digital inputs
Number 2 None
Galvanic isolation Yes
Input voltage for
L i l “0”
0 t 5 V DC
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
0 to 5 V DC
13 to 30 V DC
Logical 1
Input current for signal “1”
13 to 30 V DC
typ. 7 mA
Delay time < 10 ms
Digital outputs
Number 2 None
Galvanic isolation
Max. permissible current
Short-circuit protection
Yes
0.5 A
Yes; electronic
Line length (max.) 30 m
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
0 to +55 °C
–40 to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus connector)
Mounting 4 M5 screws; mounting on any plate or wall
Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
IP67
MTBF (at 40 °C) 30 ⋅ 104 hours = 34 years
Interfaces
6-29
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
PROFIBUS DP
master module
(e.g. S7-400 CPU)
PROFIBUS line
MDS
To other PROFIBUS nodes
AT-comp. PC
MDS
24 V
for ASM
and SLGs
1st SLG2nd SLG
* standard cable length
2 m*
Figure 6-22 Configurator for ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 has the same housing as the ET 200X distributed I/O de-
vice. General information on the ASM 450/452 (for example, mounting, ope-
ration, wiring, and general technical specifications) can be found in the
ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0). Accessories and power
supply components are also described in this manual.
The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration
by means of a DDB file. The ASM can then be configured using SIMATIC
Manager’s HWCONFIG or another PROFIBUS tool. The MOBY software
contains a DDB file for each ASM version.
An SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 450/452.
To ensure the simplest SLG connection, use a preprepared cable (see Fi-
gure 6-24 and Section 3.7). The standard version of the connecting cable is
2 m in length (for other cable lengths: see Section 3.7.4).
An SLG connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want
to make their own cable (see Figure 6-23). Cables and SLG connectors can
be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
description
PROFIBUS
configuration
SLG connection
method
Interfaces
6-30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SLG cable: 6GT2 090-0A
PG 11 screw connection,
max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm
(do not tighten screw until
connector is assembled)
2 screws to open
the connector
Coupling
connector
M12 on ASM 450
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Connec-
tor pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Core color
Green
White
Brown
Yellow
Gray
Pink
- (nc)
Shield
Connection to
pin of SLG
connector
4
6
1
5
3
2
-
Connector hood removed
IP67 degree of protection
50
18.5
Figure 6-23 Connector ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00)
6
1
4
5
3
2
Two 5-pin, round
M12 connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
SLG
connector (socket)
2 m *
* standard length
X1 X2
25
18.5
Figure 6-24 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20)
Interfaces
6-31
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 450/452 can also be operated with the “green” PROFIBUS cable.
Make sure that a 24 V cable leads from X12 to X13. The 24 V cable can be
connected to pin 5 or 6 in connector X12.
X13 X11
X12
X13 X11
X12
Figure 6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V supply
PROFIBUS cable
with 24 V supply
Interfaces
6-32 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SLG - SLG 2xDO SLG
- SLG 2xDI SLG SLG
x1 x2
x3 x4
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5. *
* Only static processing of the MDS is permissible
in this configuration
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
SLG - SLG
- SLG SLG
1st 2nd 3. *
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
Config
Connector
Config
Connector
Figure 6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452
The versions shown in Figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of
MOBY or ET 200X.
Note
The configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the
ASM 450. However, it requires customer-specific wiring of the components.
The following figure shows the dimensioned drawing of an ASM 450/452
with bus connectors. You must add the length of the PG screw connection
and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified.
110
90
53,5 28,25
134
120
Ø 5.5
Figure 6-27 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 450/452
SLG and DI/DO
configuration for
ASM 450/452
Dimensioned
drawing of the
ASM 450/452 with
mounting holes
Interfaces
6-33
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows the pin assignment of the ASM 450/452.
1
2
3
4
5
654
32
1
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
32
1
32
1
X11
X12
X13
Socket
X11 and X12
(PROFIBUS DP)
Pin Allocation
1 Signal B (red)
2PE
3* PE
4 Signal A (green)
5* L+
6* M
X13
(supply voltage)
1PE
2L+
3M
4PE
5L+
6M
SF
BF
ON
24 V DC
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452
RxD: SLG with active command
PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error display
PRE/ERR 2: For each SLG (the “MDS present”
display
always has priority. The
error display only occurs
when there is no MDS present.)
MDS present :
The LED is permanently ON. If there is
more than one MDS in the field, the
number of MDS is indicated by short
breaks in the light. There is no
error output.
Error display:
The LED is permanently OFF. The last
error number is indicated by a short light
pulse.
SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected.
SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected.
Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected.
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
SF: System Fault (see Table 6-11)
BF: Bus Fault (see Table 6-11)
ON: On when the logic voltage is present on
the ASM (is generated from the 24 V
supply voltage)
24 V DC: On when the 24 V supply voltage is
connected to the ASM.
* Do not wire
Pin assignment (SLG)
Socket
X1/X3
X2/X4
1 +RxD
2 +TxD
3 -TxD
4 -RxD
5PE
RxD
PRE/ERR1
ASM 450
ASM 452
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450
RxD: SLG active
ANW: MDS present
and status of DO1
ERR: Error display
and status of DO0
SLG1/2: Indicates the selected SLG. Only SLG 1
or SLG 2 can be selected.
DE0/1 : Status of the digital inputs
1
2
3
4
5
654
321
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
321
321
X11
X12
X13
SF
24 V DC
RxD
PRE/ERR 1
SLG 2
RxD
SLG 1
BF
ON
PRE/ERR 2
1 +24 V + 24 V
2 DO1 DI1
30 V0 V
4 DO0 DI0
5PEPE
X2 X4
SLG 1
SLG 2
RxD
PRE/ERR2
Figure 6-28 Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 450/452
Pin assignments
Interfaces
6-34 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following table lists the possible error displays, what they mean and how
to eliminate the cause of the fault.
Table 6-11 LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics
LED
“BF”
LED
“SF”
Cause Error handling:
On * ASM 450/452 is starting up. –
The connection to the DP master has
failed.
The ASM 450/452 cannot detect a trans-
mission rate.
Check the PROFIBUS DP connection.
Check the DP master.
Bus interruption
DP master is out of operation
Check all the cables in your
PROFIBUS DP network.
Check whether the PROFIBUS DP connector
is plugged in correctly on the ASM 450/452.
Flas-
hes
On The configuration data sent from the DP
master to the ASM 450/452 do not corre-
spond to the configuration of the
ASM 450/452.
Check the configuration of the ASM 450/452
(input/output, PROFIBUS address).
Correct DDB file used?
– SIEM804C.GSD for ASM 450
– SIEM80B6.GSD for ASM 452
Flas-
hes
Off The ASM 450/452 has detected the trans-
mission rate but is not addressed by the
DP master.
The ASM 450/452 was not configured.
Check the PROFIBUS address set in the
ASM 450/452 or in the configuration software.
Check the configuration of the ASM 450/452
(station type).
On Flas-
hes
There is a hardware defect in the
ASM 450/452.
Replace the ASM 450/452.
* Status is not relevant
PROFIBUS
diagnostics
Interfaces
6-35
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are
valid for all cables which you can connect to the connector. Any shield brai-
ding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off.
45
6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Twisted and trimmed
shield braiding
Figure 6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable
The connector plate of the ASM must be removed before you canset the
PROFIBUS address or turn on the terminating resistor. The connector plate
covers the DIPswitches. The following figure shows the location of the DIPs-
witches on the ASM and a sample setting of each.
Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery)
7654321
ON
23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120
8
Example:Terminating resistor switched off (status on delivery)
off
on
ASM 450
n. c.
n. c.
ASM 452
Normal operation
(Use DDB file
SIEM80B6)
ASM 451-compatible
(use DDB file
SIEM804D)
Figure 6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance
Note
The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to
the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM in the configuration soft-
ware.
For correct functioning of the terminating resistor, always switch both
DIPswitches of the terminating resistor to “on” or “off”.
Example for bared
lengths
PROFIBUS
address and
terminating
resistor
Interfaces
6-36 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.5 ASM 454/424
The ASM 454/424 interfaces are designed for distributed configurations in
assembly lines. The robust and attractive housing can be mounted anywhere.
Up to four write/read devices in the MOBY E range can be connected and
run in parallel. This ensures dynamic operation of the connected SLGs. The
user has a choice of two interfaces.
PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 454)
RS 232; serial interface for the PC (ASM 424)
Figure 6-31 ASM 454/424 interface
Data can be accessed directly in the MDS by means of physical addresses
using the ASM 454. Communication to the user is by means of the acyclic
PROFIBUS DPV1 protocol service. The function FC 45 is available to
SIMATIC S7 users as a simple means of integration.
The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation
(see appendix of FC 45 description) is available to programmers of control-
lers of other manufacturers.
Data can be accessed directly in the by means of physical addresses using the
ASM 424. Communication with the user is via a serial RS 232 interface using
the 3964R protocol. This makes it easy to connect PCs and controllers of
other manufacturers to the MOBY E identification system. A C library
(MOBY API) is available to PC users for their applications.
Application area
ASM 454
ASM 424
Interfaces
6-37
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-12 Ordering data for the ASM 454/424
ASM 454 interface
for the operation of MOBY E components via
PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler
ASM 424 interface
With serial RS 232/RS 422 interface;
3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and
controllers of other manufacturers
6GT2 002-2EE00
6GT2 002-2CE00
Accessories
RS 232 plug-in line between PC ↔ ASM 424
Can be made to a maximum length of 32 m
(see Section 3.7.4)
SLG plug-in line (see Section 3.7)
Connector for power supply (socket) for
ASM 454/424
Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting
Wide-range power supply unit
100-230 V AC/24 V DC; 2.2 A
(without 24 V cable)
24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power sup-
ply unit
6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2)
Length: 5 m
PROFIBUS connector
9-pin subminiature D connector for 2 plug-in
lines
MOBY software1
with C library for the ASM 424 (MOBY API)
and FC 45, DDB file for the ASM 454
6GT2 391-0B...
6GT2 091-0A...
6GT2 390-1AB00
6GT2 390-0BA00
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
(for other connectors, see catalog
ST 70 or IK PI)
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of FC 45 (for the ASM 454)
German
English
French
Description of MOBY API
(C library for the ASM 424)
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See Section 7.1
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-38 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-13 Technical data of the ASM 454/424
ASM 454 ASM 424
Serial interface to user
Max. cable length
PROFIBUS DPV1
See PROFIBUS configuration.
RS 232/RS 422
30/500 m
Procedure/protocol EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R
Connection 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment)
Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps
(automatic recognition)
38.4 kbps
Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (acyclic) 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG 4 x 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment)
Cable length Max. of 1000 m SLG-dependent (see Section 3.7)
SLG which can be connec-
ted
4 x SLG 7x (parallel operation)
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1
master
MOBY API:
C-Lib for
PCs with
Windows 98/NT
Function block
SIMATIC S7 FC 45 –
MDS addressing
Commands
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS
Supply voltage
Connector
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
(max.)
Max. current consumption
4-pin, M12 round connector (pin)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
250 mA (without SLG)
1.1 A (without SLG)
UL/CSA Yes, in connection with a power supply of
NEC Class 2
Ambient temperature
Di ti
25 t 55 °C ( d ti)
During operation
Durin
g
trans
p
ortation and
–25 to +55 °C (no condensation)
–40 to +85 °C
(
no condensation
)
During transportation and
storage
–
40 to +85 C (no condensation)
Housing
Dimensions (WxHxD) in
mm
Material
Color
205 x 130 x 60 (without connector)
Aluminum
Anthracite
Technical data
Interfaces
6-39
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-13 Technical data of the ASM 454/424
ASM 424ASM 454
Mounting
Tightening torque
4 M5 screws
Optional: top-hat rail mounting
≤ 3 Nm
Weight (approx.)
Protection rating in accor-
dance with EN 60529
MTBF (at 40 °C)
1300 g
IP40 (higher rating on request)
1 ⋅ 105 hours
24 V=
230 V
6GT2 091-0A...
6GT2 494-0AA00
or other
24 V connection
6GT2 491-1HH50
SLG SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDS MDSMDS
PROFIBUS:
Connector = 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
RS 232:
PC-cable = 6GT2 391-0B...
RS 422:
Make cable as in Figure 6-34
Figure 6-32 Configurator for the ASM 454/424
Interfaces
6-40 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
RxD
PRE ERR
RxD:
PRE:
ERR:
SLG with command active
“Presence” indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window
Error indicated by flashing LED (under preparation)
Connector 1 to 4 to the SLG
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
+ Sending
+Receiving
Not used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
Not used
Housing Cable shield
Figure 6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG
PROFIBUS
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
Not used
B-line (red)
Request to send (RTS)
Ground 5 V (M5)
Potential 5 V
Not used
A-line (green)
Not used
Housing Cable shield
PROFIBUS
(floating; 60 mA)
SERIAL 24 V DC
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V are applied to
(green) the ASM
SF/BF: System fault/bus
(red) Fault RAM error
ASM 424: flashes
after power up;
flashing stops after
the first correct
message frame
ACT: This LED flashes
(green) once briefly when a
command has
finished being
processed.
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Socket RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Not used
Not used
Ground (0 V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
24 VDC
Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address
Switch 1 ON:20
Switch 2 ON: 21
:
Switch 7 ON: 26
Example: PROFIBUS-Address= 84
(22 + 24 + 26)
Switch 8: Interface
ON: RS 422
OFF: RS 232
Switch 9 to 12: free
1
2
34
RS 422
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
1 Only in the case of the ASM 454
2 Only in the case of the ASM 424
1
2
1
2
Figure 6-34 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user
Pin assignment
and switches
Interfaces
6-41
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
129
205
Figure 6-35 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 454/424
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 6-36 How to mount the adapter plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° on the floor plate before
mounting if the situation requires it.
Dimensioned
drawing with
mounting holes
Adapter floor plate
for top-hat
rail mounting
Interfaces
6-42 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6 ASM 456
6.6.1 Description
The ASM 456 interface modules are slave modules for operating MOBY
components via the PROFIBUS DP/DPV1 on any control systems.
Figure 6-37 Interface module ASM 456 with M12, 7/8” or ECOFAST connection
block
When operating the interface module on a SIMATIC S7, convenient function
modules are made available to the user.
The ASM 456 replaces the ASM 452 in terms of functionality and provides a
simplified connection system. You can continue to use the user software from
ASM 452. Optimum data throughput can be achieved through acyclic data
traffic on the PROFIBUS DPV1 even when using large PROFIBUS confi-
gurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 456 on the PROFIBUS
provides the user with the guarantee that other PROFIBUS consumers (e.g.
DI/DO) can still be processed at great speed.
Up to 2 read/write devices (SLG) can be operated in parallel on the
ASM 456. The user can start a command in parallel on 2 SLGs (via the cor-
responding FB/FC).
Area of application
Features
Interfaces
6-43
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The mobile data memory (MDS) data is accessed by means of physical ad-
dressing of the MDS. In SIMATIC S7, the FB/FC 45 is available for this pur-
pose. The FB/FC 45 provides the S7 user with a easy-to-use interface with
powerful commands (processing one complete MDS with one command;
command linking; S7 data structures via UDTs).
Degree of protection IP67
System integration with ECOFAST or M12, 7/8” concept
T functionality, that is, a component can be replaced without adversely
affecting other modules with regard to bus communication and voltage
supply.
Standardized PROFIBUS user interface for identification systems with
PIB (Proxy Ident Function Block; with later firmware version).
Firmware update
PROFIBUS interface module up to 12 Mbit/s with automatic transfer rate
detection
Parameterizable device-related diagnostics data with text display
Support for I&M functionality (a mechanism for reading out information
via the module and saving system information such as function, installa-
tion date, installation location, and comments.)
Other features
Interfaces
6-44 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 456 has the same housing as the distributed I/O system ET 200eco.
The ASM has a connection block for connecting up to the PROFIBUS DP
which is available in ECOFAST version or M12, 7/8” version optionally.
The following figure shows the basic design of the ASM 456.
X1
X2
6GT2002–0ED00
MOBY ASM 456
Connector socket for 1st SLG
Status LEDs for operation of the 1st SLG
Connector socket for 2nd SLG
Status LEDs for operation of the 2nd SLG
Status LEDs for interface module
Space for connection block
Protective Earth
Figure 6-38 Basic design of the ASM 456
Design
Interfaces
6-45
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows how the ASM 456 is integrated in an automation
system.
24 V for ASM 456 and SLGs
X1
X2
X1
X2
2 m*
PROFIBUS DP
Master module
e. g. S7-400 CPU
PROFIBUS
cable
to other
PROFIBUS bus nodes
ASM 456
* Standard cable length
2. SLG 1. SLG
MDS MDS
Figure 6-39 Configurator ASM 456
The ASM 456 is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a
GSD file. The ASM can then be configured using the hardware configuration
of the SIMATIC manager or another PROFIBUS tool (e.g. operating mode).
The GSD file can be found on the “Software MOBY” CD or on the Internet.
Integration
Interfaces
6-46 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address
The PROFIBUS address defines the address at which the ASM 456 distribu-
ted I/O system is found on the PROFIBUS DP.
The PROFIBUS DP address for the ASM 456 is set on the connection
block.
Each address can be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.
The PROFIBUS address set must match the PROFIBUS address defined
in the configuring software (for the ASM 456).
Changes to the PROFIBUS DP address only take effect once the mains
have been switched ON on the ASM 456.
Socket wrench 14 mm
Screwdriver 2.5 mm
Features
Requirements
Tools required for
M12, 7/8” connec-
tion block
Interfaces
6-47
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 99.
1. Remove the two seal caps from the rotary switches (if necessary, use a
14 mm socket wrench).
2. Set the required PROFIBUS address on the rotary switches using a screw-
driver.
– Lower rotary switch: 1st position
– Upper rotary switch: 10th position
3. Screw the two seal caps back onto the rotary switches (torque: 0.5 to
0.8 Nm).
x1
x10
x10
x1
Rotary switch
for PROFIBUS
address
Position 9
Position 2
PROFIBUS address 92:Example
Figure 6-40 Setting PROFIBUS addresses on connection block M12, 7/8”
Setting
PROFIBUS DP
addresses on
connection block
M12, 7/8”
Interfaces
6-48 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 99.
1. Loosen the screw connection of the configuration plug with the
ECOFAST connection block and remove the plug.
1
Figure 6-41 Loosening the configuration plug’s screw connection
2. Loosen the screw connection for the cover cap on the configuration plug
and remove the latter.
3. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches.
ON ON
17
23456
2
Example: PROFIBUS address 92
22 + 23 + 24 + 26 = 4 + 8 + 16 + 64 = 92
Figure 6-42 Setting PROFIBUS address on configuration plug
4. Screw the cover cap back down, plug the configuration plug onto the con-
nection block and screw the configuration plug to the connection block.
Setting
PROFIBUS DP
addresses on
connection block
ECOFAST
Interfaces
6-49
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.3 Wiring ASM 456
The table below contains the connector assignment for the ECOFAST con-
nector plugs:
Table 6-14 Connection assignment for ECOFAST connector plugs
Pin Assignment View of ECOFAST connector plug
(wiring end for supply and
loop-through connection)
APROFIBUS DP signal A
Signal A
BPROFIBUS DP signal B Signal A
Signal B
1
1Electronic/encoder supply (1L+)
(voltage supply for ASM 456 and SLG) ECOFAST
hybrid cable
g
1
23
4
AB
1
2Ground for electronic / encoder supply (1M)
hybrid cable
2L+
1
23
4
3Ground for load voltage supply (2M)
2L+
4Load voltage supply (2L+)
(unused on ASM 456)
1L+
1 You will find the assembly instructions in the packaging of the Han Brid Cu cable connector and/or Han Brid Cu cable
socket.
Wiring ECOFAST
connector plugs
Interfaces
6-50 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The tables below contain the connector assignment for the M12, 7/8” connec-
tor:
Table 6-15 Connection assignment for M12 connector (PROFIBUS DP)
Pin Assignment View of M12 connector
(wiring side)
1Supply positive (P5V2) 1
Signal A (green)
Supply DP1
2Data line A (RxD / TxD-N)
Signal A (green)
1
2
3Data reference potential (M5V2) 1
4
1
2
3
5Shield
4Data line B (RxD / TxD-P)
43 5
Signal B (red)
5 Shield
S
ignal B
(
red
)
Bus cable
Thread Shield Loop-through
connection DP2
Bus cable
(2-core, shielded)
Signal B (red)
12
3
54
connection DP2 Signal A (green)
Shield
1 Can only be used for the M12 terminating resistor. Looping the voltage through to the next connector via a 5-core cable
is not permitted.
Table 6-16 Connection assignment for 7/8” connector (supply voltages)
Pin Assignment View of 7/8” connector
(wiring side)
1Ground for load voltage supply (2M) Supply X01
2Ground for electronic / encoder supply (1M)
51
y
2L+
3 PE 51
24
2L+
4Electronic/encoder supply (1L+)
(voltage supply for ASM 456 and SLG)
2
3
4
1L+
5Load voltage supply (2L+)
(unused on ASM 456) Loop-through
connection X02 5-core cable
1
2
3
4
5
connection X02
2L+
1L+
Wiring M12, 7/8”
connector
Interfaces
6-51
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Note
When connecting up the supply voltage, we recommend the cable specified
in section 6.6.7 (cable 5 x 1.5 mm2 pre-assembled with 7/8” connectors).
If you want to assemble the cable yourself, then the conductor cross-section
should be 1.5 mm2.
1. Isolate the grounding cable and secure the cable lug.
2. Screw the cable lug down to the ASM 456 (M5 retaining bolt). The torque
is 3 Nm.
Figure 6-43 Connecting the ASM 456 up to protective earth
Connecting the
ASM 456 up to
protective earth
Interfaces
6-52 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Standard cable
l
Figure 6-44 Connecting cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m
l
Figure 6-45 Extension cable ASM 456 ↔ SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
Maximum cable length
The ASM 456 can be operated with any SLG configuration with a maximum
cable length of 50 m.
Longer connecting cables of up to 1000 m are possible in some instances.
The current consumption of the connected SLG must however be taken into
account.
Sequential arrangement of several sub-sections to form a long section of ca-
ble must be avoided due to the additional contact resistances.
Connecting SLG to
ASM 456
Interfaces
6-53
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Customer cable fabricating
A SLG connector plug with screw-on clamps is provided for users who want
to individually pre-assemble their own cables. Cables and SLG connector
plugs can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
You will need cables of the following specifications for self-assembled cables:
7 x 0.25 mm2
LiYC11Y 7 x 0.25
M12 connectors can be obtained from the relevant specialist dealers
(e. g. Binder).
The pin assignment is listed in the following table.
Table 6-17 Pin assignment
Socket X1, X2 Pin Signal Core color
1+24 V Note data sheet provided by cable
ft
2 –RxD manufacturer
3230 V
41
8
4 RxD
4
7
8
5
5 TxD
7
5
66 –TxD
7 Free
8PE / shield
Interfaces
6-54 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.4 Diagnosis using LEDs
The following figure shows details of the LEDs of the ASM 456.
PROFIBUS
SF BF ON DC24V
X1
X2
6GT2002–0ED00
MOBY ASM456
ACT_1 PRE_1
RxD_1 ERR_1
ACT_2 PRE_2
SLG 2
SLG 1
RxD_2 ERR_2
Figure 6-46 LEDs of the ASM 456
Table 6-18 Status LEDs for ASM 456
LEDs Meaning1
ON Lights up when there is logic voltage at the ASM (is generated by the 24 V supply voltage.)
DC 24 V Lights up when the 24 V supply voltage is connected to the ASM.
ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding SLG is active in processing a user command.
ERR_1, ERR_2 1A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur.
PRE_1, PRE_2 2Indicates the presence of an MDS.
RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates live communication with the SLG. Faults on the SLG may also cause this display to
light up.
1 The meaning of the individual flash patterns and the associated fault descriptions can be found in the relevant FB and
FC documentation.
2 In multitag mode, this LED uses a flash interval to indicate the number of data media currently within the range of
influence of the SLG.
Interfaces
6-55
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-19 LED display for PROFIBUS diagnosis
BF SF Cause of error Error handling
On – ASM is in start-up mode. –
Connection to DP Master failed.
ASM not detecting a baud rate
Check the PROFIBUS DP connection.
Check the DP Master
Bus interrupt
DP Master not functioning
Check all cables in your PROFIBUS DP net-
work.
Check whether the connector plugs for the
PROFIBUS DP are securely plugged into the
ASM.
flashes On The project data sent to the ASM by the
DP Master do not match the configura-
tion of the ASM.
Check the project for the ASM (input/output,
PROFIBUS address).
Correct GSD file being used?
flashes – ASM has detected the baud rate, but is
not activated by the DP Master.
ASM has not been assigned project
plans
Check the PROFIBUS address set in ASM
and/or in the project software.
Check the project for the ASM (station type).
On flashes There is a hardware defect in the ASM. Replace the ASM.
Off On Diagnosis available Evaluate the diagnostic information.
On Off The set PROFIBUS address is incorrect
or greater than 99.
Set the address in the range 1 to 99 and carry
out new ramp-up.
–= Status not relevant
Other ASM operating modes are indicated by the PRE, ERR, ACT, SF and
ON LEDs:
ON SF PRE_1 ERR_1 ACT_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 ACT_2 Description
On Off Off Off On Off Off Off Ramp-up active
Off On Off On Off Off Off Off Checksum error at ramp-up
Off On Off Off Off Off On Off Firmware invalid
On On On On On On On On LED test for approximately 4 se-
conds; otherwise firmware fault
Off On Off On On Off On On Checksum error at ramp-up
Off On On On On Off On On Checksum error of the firmware
Off On On On On On On On External RAM defective
Off On On Off On On On On DPC-RAM defective
Off On Off On On On On On ID error firmware
On – Off 1 x flash
every 3 s
Off Off 1 x flash
every 3 s
Off ASM successfully ramped up,
waiting for reset command
On – –Flashing Rapid
flashing
–Flashing Rapid
flashing
Firmware update; alternate flas-
hing of the error LEDs at approxi-
mately 1 Hz
–= not relevant
Interfaces
6-56 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.5 Technical data
Table 6-20 Technical data of ASM 456
Serial interface to the user
Procedure after connection
Transfer rate
Block length, max.
PROFIBUS DPV1
EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS
M12 and 7/8” technology / ECOFAST
9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic detection )
2 words cyclic /240 byte acyclic
Serial interface to SLG
Connector
Line length, max.
Connectable SLG
2x coupling connector M12
1000 m; depends on SLG; 2 m = standard length;
other fabricatable cables = 5 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
Extenxion cables = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
2x SLG
Software functions
Programming
Function modules for
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7
MDS addressing
Commands
Depending on the PROFIBUS DP Master
–
FB/FC 45 (normal addressing without multitag)
FB/FC 55 (normal addressing with multitag)
accessed directly via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS, etc.
Supply voltage: 2
Rated value
Permissible range
Current consumption 1
Potential isolation
DC 24 V
DC 20 V to 30 V
Max. 800 mA; typ. 80 mA (without SLG)
Yes
Ambient temperature
during operations
during transport and storage
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
only ASM 456
ASM 456 with ECOFAST connection block
Weight
Degree of protection
MTBF (at 40 °C)
0 °C to +55 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
60 x 210 x 30
60 x 210 x 60
Approx. 210 g
IP67
122 years
1 The power supply must deliver the required current of up to 800 mA for brief power failures ≤ 20 ms.
2 All supply voltages and signal voltages must be protective low level voltage (SELV/PELV acc. to EN 60950)
24V DC supply: fused (electrical) isolation of low level voltage (SELV/PELV acc. to EN 60950)
Interfaces
6-57
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.6 Dimensional drawings
The following figure shows the dimensional drawing of an ASM 456 with
bus connection block.
28
42.1
53.9
28
38.5
53
59.85
79
x1
x10
210
x1
x2
MOBY ASM 456
MOBY ASM 456
210
x1
x2
60 60
with connection block M12, 7/8” with connection block ECOFAST
Figure 6-47 Dimensional drawing of ASM 456 (in mm)
Interfaces
6-58 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.6.7 Ordering data
Table 6-21 Ordering data of ASM 456
Interface ASM 456
for PROFIBUS DPV1, max. 2 SLG can be connected up
6GT2 002-0ED00
Accessories for ECOFAST connection:
Connection block ECOFAST
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid plug 180
with pin insert (5 per pack)
with socket insert (5 per pack)
PROFIBUS ECOFAST termination plug with terminating resistor
ECOFAST hybrid cable (pre-assembled)
ECOFAST hybrid cable (not pre-assembled, sold by the meter)
6ES7 194-3AA00-0AA0
6GK1 905-0CA00
6GK1 905-0CB00
6GK1 905-0DA10
6XV1 830-7B... 1
6XV1 830-7AH10
Accessories for M12 7/8” connection:
Connection block M12
M12 terminal resistor for PROFIBUS (5 per pack)
PROFIBUS cable with pre-assembled M12 connectors
Cable for supply voltage with pre-assembled 7/8” connectors
PROFIBUS FC standard non-pre-assembled cable;
max. length 1000 m
PROFIBUS M12 connector plug (5 per pack)
with pin insert
with socket insert
Connector plug 7/8” for supply voltage (5 per pack)
with pin insert
with socket insert
6ES7 194-3AA00-0BA0
6GK1 905-0EC00
6XV1 830-3D... 1
6XV1 822-5B... 1
6VX1 830-0EH10
6GK1 905-0EA00
6GK1 905-0EB00
6GK1 905-0FA00
6GK1 905-0FB00
Accessories for MOBY:
Connecting cable ASM ↔ SLG
See section 3.7.4.
Extension cable ASM ↔ SLG
See section 3.7.4.
6GT2 091-0FH..
6GT2 891-0F...
MOBY Software 2
with FB/FC 45, FB/FC 55, FB/FC 56, GSD file
6GT2 080-2AA10
Other accessories for ASM 456 (network components) ET 200eco manual
6ES7 198-8GA00-8AA0
Description of FB/FC 45 (for ASM 456)
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 These cables are available in different lengths. See Catalog IK PI for more details
2 See section 7.1
Interfaces
6-59
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.7 ASM 470/475
The ASM 470 475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and
ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems.
Up to eight ASM 470/475 interface modules can be installed and operated in
a single module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several
module racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed
and operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300
configuration, up to 32 ASMs can be used. The ASMs can also be operated
on the ET 200M distributed I/O system on PROFIBUS. This makes operation
in an S7-400 environment possible without any problems. Up to 7 ASMs can
be run on one ET 200M.
Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs.
Galvanic isolation between the SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensures
configurations are not susceptible to interference.
Figure 6-48 ASM 470/475 interface
In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470.
The FC 47 function ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7 tools.
FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The ET 200M can
also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is
available for PLCs 115U to 155U.
On the hardware side, communication between the ASM 470 and the S7-300
CPU takes place via a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data
can be transferred with each read/write command.
Application
area
ASM 470
Interfaces
6-60 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2 002-0GA10 is a parameterizable
module. The basic functions of the module are therefore already defined
when the module is configured in HWCONFIG (e.g. normal addressing or
filehandler).
The ASM 475 accesses data on the MDS directly by means of physical ad-
dresses. The FC 45 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7.
The ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit with which the MDS data can be easily
read at optimum speed. A 32 KB MDS memory is read in 24 s almost inde-
pendently of the S7 cycle time.
The filehandler function is not available in MOBY E.
ASM 470
ASM 475
SLG SLG
MDS MDS
Shield terminal
(6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)
Shield contact element
(6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0)
for 2 modules
6GT2 091-0E...
(see Section 3.7
or Figure 6-51)
Figure 6-49 Configurator for the ASM 470/475
ASM 475
ASM 475
(normal
addressing)
ASM 475
(Filehandler)
Interfaces
6-61
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-22 Ordering data for the ASM 470/475
ASM 470 interface
For SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex
without a front connector
ASM 475 interface
For SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel;
normal addressing; without a front connector
6GT2 002-0FA10
6GT2 002-0GA10
Accessories:
front connector (1x per ASM)
Shield terminal (1 per SLG cable)
Shield contact element (1 per 2 ASMs)
Connecting cable ASM ↔ SLG
(see Section 3.7.4)
MOBY software 1
with FC 47, FB 47 for the ASM 470 and
FC 45 for the ASM 475
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
6GT2 091-0E...
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of ASM 470/FC 47 for S7
German
English
Description of ASM 470/FB 47 for S5
German
English
Description of FC 45 (for ASM 475)
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See Section 7.1
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-62 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-23 Technical data of the ASM 470/475
ASM type ASM 470 ASM 475
Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M P bus; distributed input and out-
put
P bus; cyclic and acyclic services
Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic);
238 bytes (acyclic)
Command buffer in the ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG
Serial interface to SLG
Connector With screw terminals on the front connector
The front connector is not included with the product
Line length (max.) Ready-made standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
Supported MOBY systems I/E/F/V I/E/F
Connectable SLGs Multiplex operation
2 x SLG
Parallel operation
2 x SLG
Software functions
Programming SIMATIC user: via FC/FB
Third-party user: message frame description as in the
appendix of the FC description
Function block
SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45
SIMATIC S5 FB 47 –
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS
PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes, can be assigned via RESET
S7 diagnosis No Yes, can be called via S7 OM
Firmware can be loaded No Yes, via S7 OM
Supply voltage
Nominal value 24 V DC
Perm. range 20 V DC to 30 V 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption
without SLG at U = 24 V DC, max. 50 mA 350 mA
with connected SLGs Max. 600 mA with one SLG
Max. 300 mA per SLG if two
SLGs are connected
Max. 500 mA per connected
SLG
Power loss of the module, typically 1 W 2 W
Current consumption from P bus, max. 100 mA 80 mA
Galvanic isolation between S7-300 and
MOBY
Conditional (100 kΩ between
S7-300 and 24 V DC)
Yes, use a separate power supply
unit for the ASM for ungrounded
operation
Technical data
Interfaces
6-63
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-23 Technical data of the ASM 470/475
ASM type ASM 475ASM 470
24 V fuse to the SLG Yes, electronic Yes, electronic
Ambient temperature
During operation
Horizontal installation of SIMATIC 0 °C to +60 °C
Vertical installation of SIMATIC 0 °C to +40 °C
During transportation and storage –40 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions in mm (WxHxD) 40 x 125 x 120
Weight (approx.) 0.2 kg
MTBF (at 40 °C) 1 ⋅ 106 hours
The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps.
Mount module
Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual.
Note
The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module
is mounted.
!Warning
The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off.
Note
To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that the
ASM and SIMATIC CPU (or the ASM and IM 153 in the case of the
ET 200M) use the same voltage.
If not, error indicators which light up on the CPU when the ASM is turned
on may not go off.
Wiring
Interfaces
6-64 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the in-
side of the front door with the related terminal assignment diagram. The
SLGs must be connected to the ASM as shown in the terminal assignment
diagram.
Status and error indicators
SLG 1
S+
S–
E+
E–
SLG 2
S+
S–
E+
E–
Connection diagram
The numbers for the
connection are based on
connector X1 located on
the upper part of the
housing.
ASM 475 SF
5 VDC
ACT_1
ERR_1
PRE_1
RxD_1
ACT_2
ERR_2
PRE_2
RxD_2
6GT2 002-0GA106GT2 002-0FA10
MOBY
ASM 470
MOBY
SF
24 V
Active
Error
SLG 1
RxD
ANW
Error
SLG 2
RxD
Figure 6-50 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475
Front panel
Interfaces
6-65
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-24 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 470/475
ASM 470 ASM 475 Meaning
SF SF System fault (hardware error in the ASM )
24 V 5 V DC 24 V are connected to the ASM and the
5 V voltage in the ASM is okay
Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding SLG is active when a user
command is processed.
Error ERR_1, ERR_2 A flashing pattern shows the error that occurred
last. This indicator can be reset with the parameter
Option_1.
ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS
RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates current communication with the SLG;
interference on the SLG can also cause this indica-
tor to go on.
SLG 1, SLG 2 –Indicates the SLG that has been selected by the
user command. Only one of the LEDs may be on
at a time (multiplex operation).
The LEDs PRE, ERR and SF on the ASM 475 indicate additional operating
states.
Table 6-25 Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475
SF PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, causes, remedy
ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, etc.).
ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware loading procedure is active or no firm-
ware detected
→Load firmware
→Don’t turn off ASM during this.
OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start is required
→Load firmware again
→Check update files
Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error
→Turn ASM off/on.
OFF OFF 1 flash
every 2 s
OFF 1 flash
every 2 s
ASM has started up and is waiting for a
RESET (init_run) from the user
Display elements
on the ASM
Interfaces
6-66 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The figure below shows a connecting cable between the ASM and SLG. The
colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See Sec-
tion 3.7.3.
SLG connector
(socket)
Cable with wire end ferrules
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
(Shield)
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Front connector
of the ASM
(6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)
Baring of the cable shield
Figure 6-51 Wiring from the ASM 470/475 to the SLG (6GT2 091-0E...)
See Section 3.6 or Figure 6-49.
Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your
application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consi-
deration of the entire system.
To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield contact
element (see Figure 3-47). When customers make their own cables, the shield
of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in Figure 6-52.
17030
Specifications in mm
Figure 6-52 Baring of the cable shield for a cable made by the customer
Wiring to the SLG
Shield connection
Lightning
protection
Cable
made by
the customer
Interfaces
6-67
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Note
Installation of MOBY requires that functional STEP 7 software has been
installed on the PC/PG.
Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is han-
dled by an installation program. The installation program is included with the
“MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10).
The installation files are in the S7_om subdirectory on the MOBY software.
Installation is largely automatic once Setup.exe has been called. The speci-
fied steps during SETUP must be responded to.
Note
Note that you have to execute a separate setup for the installation of the
ASM 470 and ASM 475.
The ASM 470/ 475 module is located in the hardware catalog of
HWCONFIG under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of
the SIMATIC S7.
SIMATIC 300
SM 300
Spezial-300
MOBY ASM470
MOBY ASM475*
6GT2 002-0GA00
MOBY ASM475 PARAM
6GT2 002-0GA10
* Type discontinued
Figure 6-53 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog
Configuration of
the ASM for
SIMATIC S7 under
STEP 7
Installation
Interfaces
6-68 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
You can use the file dearchiving function of SIMATIC Manager to load the
FC with a sample project from the relevant subdirectory of “Software
MOBY”. The sample project is located in the S7PROJ directory of SIMATIC
Manager.
ASM type Directory in
MOBY software
Project name in
SIMATIC Manager
Path name in
SIMATIC Manager
ASM 470
ASM 475
FC 47
FC 45
ASM470_CPU416
MOBY FC45
ASM470_C
Moby_f_1
FC 45/47 with
sample project
Interfaces
6-69
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.8 ASM 473
The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can be
inserted in the ET 200X distributed I/O device and DESINA.
Communication from the ET 200X to the user runs via
PROFIBUS DPV1. You can use an S7-300 or S7-400 with
an integrated PROFIBUS connection as a programmable controller.
The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules
ASM 470 and ASM 475. With the IP67 degree of protection, it can be
installed and operated directly without an additional protective housing.
The data are accessed on the MDS by means of physical addresses.
The function FC 45 is available for operation on a SIMATIC S7. The hard-
ware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an object manager
(OM) integrated in SIMATIC Manager.
Other features:
Up to 7 ASM 473s can be run in parallel on one ET 200X station.
All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the
ASM 473.
Figure 6-54 ASM 473 interface
Application
Interfaces
6-70 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-26 Ordering data for the ASM 473
Interface module ASM 473 6GT2 002-0HA10
Accessories:
SLG cable (2 m = standard cable)
For additional lengths see Section 3.7.4
Opt. ASM connector without SLG cable
(for cable lengths > 20 m)
Software MOBY1
with FC 45 incl. documentation
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 090-0BC00
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description - FC 45
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See Section 7.1
Table 6-27 Technical data of the ASM 473
Interface to ET200X
Communication
Command buffer in ASM
SIMATIC S7 P bus,
cyclic/acyclic services
2 words (cyclic)/
238 bytes (acyclic)
70 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG
Connector
Line length (max.)
Connectable SLGs
2 x coupling connectors M12
20 m;
2 m (standard cable length)
Additional ready-made cables =
5 m, 10 m, 20 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
1 x SLG 4x
Software functions
Programming
SIMATIC S7 function block
MDS addressing
Commands
PROFIBUS diagnosis
S7 diagnosis
Firmware can be loaded
Depends on PROFIBUS DP ma-
ster
FC 45
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS,
read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
yes; in accordance with ET 200X
basis station
Yes, can be called via S7 OM
yes, via SIMATIC Manager
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-71
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-27 Technical data of the ASM 473
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Perm. range
Current consumption
From sensor voltage
From load voltage (SLG supply)
Power loss of the module
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
24 V DC
20.4 to 28.8 V DC
typ. 75 mA
Max. 500 mA (or see technical
data of the connected SLG)
typ. 1.6 W
Via expansion modules from the
ET 200X family
Via expansion modules from the
ET 200X family
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
0 °C to +55 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Single device dimensions
Scaling interval
Mounting
87 x 110 x 55
60 x 110 x 55
2 M5 screws (supplied by custo-
mer)
2 M3 screws (supplied by device)
Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67
Weight 0.275 kg
For information on setup and other general technical data, see the ET 200X
manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
Interfaces
6-72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
PROFIBUS DP master module;
e.g. S7-400 CPU
(connection of non-Siemens master
under preparation)
2 m (standard cable length)
SLG
MDS
PROFIBUS
cable to all
PROFIBUS slaves
24 V power for
ET 200X electronics
and MOBY SLG
Basic module:
BM 141
BM 142
BM 143
BM 147
Figure 6-55 Configurator for the ASM 473
Note
The ET 200X differs from the ASM 45x (see Figure 6-22) in that the 24 V
must be fed to the PROFIBUS connector and the load voltage connector.
See the ET 200X manual.
Configuration
Interfaces
6-73
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following table shows the status of the ET 200X basic modules at
10/2002. The functionality of new basic modules is stored in HWCONFIG in
SIMATIC Manager.
Table 6-28 Prerequisite for operation of the ASM 473
Order number of the
ET 200X basic module
To be operated with the
ASM 473
(6GT2 002-0HA00)*
To be operated with the
ASM 473 PARAM
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Ye s
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 No yes**
6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Ye s
* Type discontinued
** Prerequisite for operation: please parameterize the module 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 in
HWCONFIG.
Basic module –
prerequisite for
operation of the
ASM 473
Interfaces
6-74 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
A maximum of 7 ASM 473s can be
used with one ET 200X.
Figure 6-56 Maximum configuration of the ASM 473 on one ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be
operated on one PROFIBUS branch.
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC Mana-
ger by calling Setup.exe in the data\S7_OM directory on the “Software
MOBY” CD. At the moment the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in a non-Sie-
mens master.
An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets, X3 and X4, on the
ASM 473. To ensure the simplest SLG connection, use a preprepared cable
(see Figure 6-24 and Section 3.7). The standard version of the connecting
cable has a length of 2 m.
Other lengths are available on request.
An SLG connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want
to make their own cable (see Figure 6-23). Cables and SLG connectors can
be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
configuration
SLG connection
method
Interfaces
6-75
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and describes the
display elements.
ERR
ON (perm.)
OFF
OFF
2 Hz
5 Hz
1 flash
every 2 s
PRE
OFF/ON
ON
2 Hz
2 Hz
5 Hz
OFF
Socket Pin assignment (SLG)
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
–TxD
–RxD
PE
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
General operating LEDs (SF, BF, ON, 24 V DC) are located on the basic
module of the ET 200X.
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: SLG is active with a command
PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS
ERR: Error indicated by flashing pattern (see Appendix B.1)
X3
1
2
3
4
5
+ 24 V
n. c.
0 V
n. c.
PE
X4
The PRE and ERR LEDs indicate other operational states of the ASM.
Description, causes, remedies
Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, etc.).
Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
Firmware loading procedure is active or no firm-
ware detected
→Load firmware
→Don’t turn off ASM during this.
Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start is required
→Load firmware again
→Check update files
Operating system error
→Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station
off/on.
ASM has started up and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
Figure 6-57 Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 473
Pin assignments
Interfaces
6-76 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the
mounting screws for one basic module and one ASM 473 expansion module.
n x 60
120
53,5
n = number of expansion modules
28,25
126.8
BM 141/142 ASM 473
87
110
For M5 mounting
screw
Figure 6-58 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules
Dimensioned
drawing of
mounting holes
Interfaces
6-77
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.9 ASM 724/754
The ASM 724/754 interfaces are designed for the distributed configuration of
identification systems for warehousing, logistics, distribution and assembly
lines. The robust and functional housing can be mounted almost anywhere.
Up to four read/write antennas can be connected and operated in quasi paral-
lel.
When more than one SLA 71 is connected, the data are processed sequen-
tially on the device.
The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) can be used to sup-
ply the power on the ASM 724 and ASM 754. The read/write antenna
(SLA 71) and stub lines must be ordered separately. The user has a choice of
two interfaces.
PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 754)
RS 232/RS 422; Serial interface to the PC and PC-compatible controllers
(e.g., SICOMP IMC) and to controllers of other manufacturers
(ASM 724). Other operating systems on request.
Figure 6-59 ASM 724/754 interface
The ASM 724 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
Communication with the user is handled by a serial RS 232/RS 422 interface
with the 3964R protocol. This makes it easy to connect PCs and controllers of
other manufacturers to the MOBY E identification system. A C library
(MOBY API) with basic functions is available to PC users for their applications
(Windows 98/NT 4.0).
The ASM 754 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
Communication to the user is by means of the acyclic PROFIBUS DPV1 pro-
tocol service. The function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 users
as a simple means of integration. The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1
implementation (see the appendix of the FC 45 description) is available to
programmers of controllers of other manufacturers.
Application area
ASM 724
ASM 754
Interfaces
6-78 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SLA SLA SLA SLA
MDS MDSMDS MDS
PROFIBUS
DPV1
24 V=
230 V
MOBY power
supply unit or other
24 V connection
ASM_channel: 1 2 3 4
MOBY E
SLA 7x and
MDS E6xx
PROFIBUS master
S7-300 (FC 45)
S7-400 (FC 45)
Other master
(non-Siemens FC)
6GT2 391-1AH50
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
Figure 6-60 Configurator for the ASM 724 and ASM 754
Interfaces
6-79
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-29 Ordering data for the ASM 724/754
ASM 724 interface
With serial RS 232/RS 422 interface;
3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and
controllers of other manufacturers for 4 SLA 71
ASM 754 interfaces
for the operation of MOBY E components via
PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler for
4 SLA 71
6GT2 302-2CE00
6GT2 302-2EE00
Accessories
SLA 71 read/write antenna
Standard connecting cable between
SLA 71 ↔ ASM 724 and ASM 754;
Length: 5 m
Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50
Length: 10 m
25 m
Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50
Length: 25 m
Wide-range power supply unit 100-230 V AC/
24 V DC; 2.2 A (24 V cable not included with
the product)
24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power sup-
ply unit 6GT2 494-0AA00;
Length: 5 m
RS 232 plug-in cable between PC and ASM 724;
(for cable lengths see Section 3.7.4)
Connector for power supply (socket) for the
ASM 724 and ASM 754
PROFIBUS connector 9-pin subminiature D
connector for 2 plug-in lines
Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting of
ASM 724/ASM 754
C-library for ASM 724 (MOBY API)
FC 45 for ASM 754
6GT2 301-2BB00
6GT2 391-1AH50
6GT2 391-1BN10
6GT2 391-1BN25
6GT2 391-1BN25
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
6GT2 391-0B...
6GT2 390-1AB00
6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
(for other connectors, see catalog
ST 70 or IK PI)
6GT2 390-0BA00
On the “Software MOBY” CD
(see Section 7.1)
On the “Software MOBY” CD
(see Section 7.1)
Description of FC 45
For ASM 754 programming
German
English
French
Description MOBY API (C-Lib for ASM 754)
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-80 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-30 Technical data of the ASM 724/754
ASM 754 ASM 724
Serial interface to user
Max. cable length
PROFIBUS DPV1
See PROFIBUS configuration.
RS 232/RS 422
30/500 m
Procedure/protocol EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R
Connection 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment)
Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps
(automatic recognition)
9.6 kbps
19.2 kbps
38.4 kbps
(automatic
recognition)
Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (acyclic) 238 bytes
Serial interface to the SLA 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment)
Cable length
(ASM to SLA)
Max. of 55 mm
No. of SLAs connectable 4 SLA 71 devices
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1
master
MOBY API:
C-Lib for PC
with Windows
98/NT 4.0
Function block
SIMATIC S7 FC 45 –
MDS addressing
Commands
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
None
None
Supply voltage
Connector
Nominal value
Perm. range
Current consumption
max. current
consumption
4-pin, M12 round connector (pin)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
250 mA (without SLA)
1.1 A (without SLA)
UL/CSA Yes, in connection with a power supply of
NEC Class 2
Ambient temperature
()
Operation
Trans
p
ortation and
–25 to +55 °C (no condensation)
–40 to +85 °C
(
no condensation
)
Transportation and
storage
–
40 to +85 C (no condensation)
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H)
Material
Color
205 x 130 x 60 (without connector)
Aluminum
Anthracite
Technical data
Interfaces
6-81
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-30 Technical data of the ASM 724/754
ASM 724ASM 754
Mounting
Tightening torque
(at room temperature)
4 M5 screws
Optional: top-hat rail mounting
≤ 3 Nm
Weight (approx.)
Protection rating in accor-
dance with EN 60529
1300 g
IP40 (higher rating on request)
Vibration in accordance
with EN 60721-3-7/
class 7M2
Vibration in accordance
with EN 60721-3-7/
class 7M2
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 1 ⋅ 105 hours
Certification CE
The ASM 724/754 is a multi-channel module. The user can operate up to 4
channels in parallel but internally the SLA 71 is controlled by a multiplexer.
This operation is also described as quasi-parallel. The ASM 724/754 is there-
fore not suitable for dynamic operation.
If the traversing speed is sufficiently slow, dynamic MDS processing can be
considered in individual cases.
The following example gives you an idea of how this works.
Task:
The MDS E624 is to be processed dynamically on 4 SLAs at a traversing
speed of 15 m/min.
Configuration:
ASM 754 with 4 SLA 71s
PROFIBUS with 3 Mbps
Controller with CPU 315-2 DP
Read requirement:
One to 16 bytes is to be read as of address 0 on all SLA 71s.
Dynamic
operation of the
ASM 724/754
Interfaces
6-82 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Result of the measurements:
t(read) = 520 ms
This means that in the worst case an MDS must be in the field for 520 ms to
ensure that it can be still be read dynamically if 4 SLAs are being operated.
If fewer than 4 SLAs are being used on the ASM 754, the time is divided
accordingly between the SLAs:
Number of SLAs Time [ms]
4 520
3 390
2 260
1* 130
* If only one SLA 71 is inserted on the ASM 724/754, the time is reduced to < 100 ms.
If you compare this time with the speed of the MDS or the different MDSs,
the result is as follows:
Number of SLAs MDS type V max. dyn.
[m/s]
V max. dyn.
[m/min]
4MDS E624 0.07 4.2
3MDS E624 0.10 6.0
2MDS E624 0.15 9.0
1MDS E624 0.29 17.4
4MDS E600 0.12 7.2
3MDS E600 0.15 9.0
2MDS E600 0.23 13.8
1MDS E600 0.46 27.6
4MDS E611 0.15 9.0
3MDS E611 0.21 12.6
2MDS E611 0.31 18.6
1MDS E611 0.62 37.2
Conclusion:
Dynamic processing of the MDS E624 on 4 SLA 71s at a
speed of 15 m/min is not possible.
Interfaces
6-83
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
RxD
PRE ERR
RxD (yellow):
PRE (green):
ERR (red):
Connection indicator; lights up if the connection to the SLA is working properly
“Presence” indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window
Error indicated by flashing LED (under preparation)
Connector 1 to 4 to the SLA
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+ 12 V
+ Sending
+Receiving
Not used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
Not used
Housing Cable shield
1432
Figure 6-61 Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the SLA 71
Pin assignment
and switches
Interfaces
6-84 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
PROFIBUS
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
Not used
B-line (red)
Request to send (RTS)
Ground 5 V (M5)
Potential 5 V
Not used
A-line (green)
Not used
Housing Cable shield
PROFIBUS
(floating; 60 mA)
SERIAL 24 V DC
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V are on the AS
M
(green)
SF/BF: System fault/bus
(red) Fault RAM error
ASM 724: flashes
after power up;
flashing stops after
the first correct
message frame
ACT: This LED flashes
(green) once briefly
when a command
has finished being
processed.
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Socket RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Not used
Not used
Ground (0 V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
24 VDC
Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS-Address
Switch 1 ON:20
Switch 2 ON: 21
:
Switch 7 ON: 26
Example: PROFIBUS-Address= 84
(22 + 24 + 26)
Switch 8: Interface
ON: RS 422
OFF: RS 232
Switches 9 to 12: Not used
1
2
34
RS 422
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
1
2
1
2
1 Only in the case of the ASM 754.
2 Only in the case of the ASM 724.
Figure 6-62 Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user
Interfaces
6-85
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
130
205
Figure 6-63 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 724/754 with mounting holes
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 6-64 How to mount the adapter plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° on the floor plate before
mounting if the situation requires it.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Adapter floor plate
for top-hat rail
mounting
Interfaces
6-86 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10 SIM Serial Interface Module
6.10.1 Overview
The primary application areas of the MOBY E SIM are data acquisition,
trade and commerce, warehousing, logistics, assembly lines and tool identifi-
cation. For acquisition support, development and pilot installation, the
MIFARE Demokit is available.
The serial interface module (SIM) is a universal module for the operation of
MOBY E via a serial interface on any
Computer
PC and
Non-Siemens PLC.
Its sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes it insensi-
tive to many chemical substances.
SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one hou-
sing. It is delivered with RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces.
The following versions are available for MOBY E.
SIM 70 ANT 0
SIM 70 ANT 1
SIM 72
All SIM models are operated with a 3964R procedure.
The SIM is connected via a serial interface of the PC (models with processors
starting at 80486SX) and run with the 3964R protocol. Driver software is
available for the 3964R protocol. C libraries with functions based on the
3964R driver platform are available for fast and easy programming.
The use of the C libraries makes it possible to operate the SIM through ap-
plications under Windows 95/NT 4.0.
Other operating systems on request.
Application
area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-87
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
AT-comp. PC
SIM 72
RS 232 / RS 422
Siemens
MOBY E
MDS E611
C library with
3964R driver
Connector power
pack
Figure 6-65 Configurator for SIM (example)
MOBY E MDS E 6xx data memories and the MIFARE card share the same
protocol but use different access keys. MDS E6xx and MIFARE have diffe-
rent access keys.
The MDS has an 8-kbit EEPROM memory which is divided into 16 sectors
(i.e. sectors 0 to 15). Each sector consists of four blocks. The block is 16 by-
tes in length and is the smallest addressable memory area on the MDS. With
one exception, each sector consists of three blocks of user data (i.e. blocks 0
to 2) and a sector trailer (i.e. block 3). Sector 0 is the exception. It contains
the card manufacturer data block in block 0 and can only be read-accessed.
Access to the MOBY E MDS is protected by two keys (i.e. A and B) per sec-
tor with individual access conditions for each block of the sector. These keys
and the individual access conditions must be specified and stored in the ap-
propriate sector trailer when the card is personalized.
With MOBY E data memories, key A is reserved and is not available for pro-
gramming. All MOBY E SIMs use this key.
Key B is available for user programming. This permits the SIM to be used to
access general MIFARE data memories. The transport key is required to
switch the SIM to another B key. Which is: 0xB0B1B2B3B4B5.
Note
Key assignment and access conditions can only be changed with the SIM.
Data structure of
the MOBY E data
memory
MDS E6xx with
SIM
Interfaces
6-88 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Sector
trailer 1
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 60
Block 61
Block 62
Block 63
Block 0
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Manufacturer’s data
User data
Sector 15
Sector 0
Sector 1
8192-bit
EEPROM
Key B (1)
Access conditions (1)
Key A (1)
Key B (0)
Access conditions (0)
Key A (0)
Access conditions (15)
Key A (15)
Key B (15)
Sector
trailer 0
Sector
trailer 15
.
.
.
User data
User data
16 sectors
4 blocks per sector = 64 blocks
16 bytes per block = 1024 bytes
47 user data blocks = 752 bytes
Keys A and B = 6 bytes
Access conditions = 4 bytes
Figure 6-66 Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM
Interfaces
6-89
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The MOBY interface modules which work with the MDS via an SLG (e.g.,
ASM 400, ASM 450, ASM 470, and so on) only access the user data via
addresses. The figure below shows the assignment of the ASM addressing to
the block structure of the MDS.
ASM Addressing MDS Structure
Decimal Hexadecimal
0
15
0000
000F
16
31
0010
001F
32
47
0020
002F
48
63
0030
003F
704
719
02C0
02CF
720
735
02D0
02DF
64
79
0040
004F
736
751
02E0
02EF
.
.
.
.
.
.
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 60
Block 61
Block 62
Block 63
Block 0
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Manufacturer’s data
User data
Key
Access
Key
User data
User data
Key
Access
Key
Key
Access
Key
Figure 6-67 Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS
The following tables provide the field data of all MOBY E components of
MDS and SIM.
All technical data are typical data, based on an ambient room temperature of
0 to +50 °C, a supply voltage of 22 to 27 V DC, and metal-free surround-
ings. Tolerances of $20 % are permitted for production conditions and
temperature fluctuations.
The field data are subject to additional tolerances when the entire voltage
range on SIM from 12 to 30 V DC and/or the entire temperature range of
MDS and SIM is/are utilized.
Field data of the
MDS and SIM
Interfaces
6-90 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-31 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal
MDS
SIM
MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233MDS E624
Length of the transmission window in mm (L)
SIM 70 ANT 0 (Ld) --- --- 4 12
SIM 70 ANT 1 (Ld) 605805--- 38
SIM 72 (Lx)2
(Ly)2
755
505
905
605
--- 60
40
Width of the transmission window in mm (W)
SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 245 (12)1
SIM 70 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1
SIM 72 (Wx)2
(Wy)2
30
20
36
24
--- 24
16
Working distance in mm (Sa)
SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8
SIM 70 ANT 1 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25
SIM 72 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 30
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 6 15
SIM 70 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40
SIM 72 70 100 --- 40
1The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation.
2 See also Figure 6-85 for the field geometry.
3MDS E623 together with SIM 70 ANT 0 only in static operation
4 In static operation, a maximum median deviation of + 2 mm is permitted.
5 Reduction by approx. 15% when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally.
See also Figure 3-1.
Note
For effects of metal on the transmission window, see Sections 3.4.2
and 3.4.3.
Table 6-32 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
MDS
E600
MDS
E611
MDS
E623
MDS
E624
SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm
SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
SIM 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm
Interfaces
6-91
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-33 Minimum distance from SIM to SIM
SIM 70
ANT 0
SIM 70
ANT 1
SIM 72
SIM 70 ANT 0 > 200 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm
SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm
SIM 72 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm
Note
Adherence to the values specified in Table 6-33 is essential. There is a dan-
ger of the influence of inductive fields if the values are underranged. This
would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command
would be terminated with errors.
Interfaces
6-92 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10.2 Cable and Connector Allocation
The 15-pin subminiature D connector (i.e. pin) is used for the following pur-
poses.
The voltage supply of SIM
The connection to the PC/computer
The connection of the inputs and outputs
Table 6-34 Overview of the SIM connector allocation
Pin Meaning
RS 232 Interface RS 422 Interface
7
8
14
15
13
12
–
–
TxD (Transmit Data)
RxD (Receive Data)
GND (Signal Ground)
E1 1 5 Input for interface switchover only
D + (Send)
E + (Receive)
D – (Send)
E + (Receive)
GND6 (Connect Signal Ground if required)
E1 1 5 Input for interface switchover only
1
9
2
+ 24 V
0V (Ground) Power supply of the SIM (12 to 30 V)
Not assigned
10
11
0V (Ground) For the power output
DPA0 3 4(Power output 24 V max. 0.5 A resistive load)
4
5
3
6
7
0V (Ground) for DA
DI0 1
DO0 2 3
DO1 2
DO2 2(only with RS 232)
0V (Ground) for DA
DI0 1
DO0 2 3
DO1 2
–––
1 logical “0”: –2 V < log 0 < 5 V / logical “1”: 12 V < log 1 < 33 V
2 Signal level and load corresponds to RS 232; Ri min = 3 kΩ (logical “0” = < –5 V to 3 kΩ / logical “1” = 5 V to 3 kΩ)
3 Output DPA0 and DO0 are parallel in function.
4 logical “0”: < 2 V to 50 Ω / logical “1”: 22 V to 50 Ω
5 RS 232 interface switchover: E1 logical “0”/RS 422: E1 logical “1”
6 Correct recognition requires that GND-SIM and GND-PC be connected with each other.
Interfaces
6-93
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Shielded data cables must be used.
Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, shielded.
Wiring varies depending on the ambient conditions and the cable lengths.
Distributor box
(IP 65)
possibly with
power supply unit Computer or PC
Customer’s
SIM
Only one connecting cable
6- to 15-core; shielded.
PC connection
4-core; shielded.
optional
Switch BERO or
similar
X
Y
Figure 6-68 Installation with one connecting cable for rugged environments
24 V DC
230 V AC
Computer or PC
SIM
PC connection
4-core; shielded.
optional
Switch BERO or
similar
2-core Power supply
2-core
X
Y
Figure 6-69 Installation with several connecting cable on the SIM connector
Suggested cabling
Interfaces
6-94 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
C library with 3964R
driver and demo
(Table 7-1)
Test cable for DI/DO and
power supply, 5 m long
(6GT2 391-1DH50)
SIM PC
RS 232
Adapter
Plug-in power supply
(6GT2 090-0HB00)
X
Y
PC
SIM
Figure 6-70 Installation with test cable and plug-in power supply (see Section 3.7.3)
Interfaces
6-95
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-35 Voltage supply of SIM
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 12 to 30 V DC
Uripple fripple
1 Vss 0 < f < 1 MHz
(measured on the SIM connector)
Current consumption
Starting current
at 24 V and room temperature
at 12 V and room temperature
700 mA
Without DO 180 mA
With DO 700 mA
Without DO 330 mA
With DO 1.03 A
The voltage can be supplied via cores of the data cable or via a separate
cable. Remember the voltage drop on the supply cable. Check the input volt-
age on the SIM during commissioning.
The permissible cable length is usually shorter than 1000 m. The length de-
pends on the current consumption of SIM and the ohmic resistance of the
connecting cable.
The following table provides an overview of permissible cable lengths.
Table 6-36 Cable configuration SIM
Conductor
cross-section
in mm2
Conductor
diameter
in mm
Resistance
in
W/km 1
Max. cable length
in m 2
DO unloaded DO max. of
500 mA
0.07 0.3 550 40 30
0.2 0.5 185 120 85
0.5 0.8 70 310 230
0.8 1.0 50 440 320
1.5 1.4 24 920 660
1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conduc-
tors. A single wire has half the resistance.
2 The output voltage on the power supply unit is 24 V DC; with a supply voltage of
30 V DC the cable lengths increase accordingly.
Field with gray background:
Recommended by Siemens: standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded). The cable
is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A...
Voltage
supply
Interfaces
6-96 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SIM Computer
TxD
RxD
Pin 1
Cable length
max. 30 m
TxD
RxD
1) Apply shield to connector housing
2) Input 1 (pin 12) open = RS 232 interface
1)
Pin assignment for
25-pin subminiature D
connector:
3 TxD
2 RxD
7 GND
9-pin subminiature D
connector:
3 TxD
2 RxD
5 GND
2) E1 1 logical “0” Pin 1
Figure 6-71 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 232
The SIM has a standard RS 232 (V.24) interface with signal lines on pins 14
and 15.
V.24 control lines (e.g. DSR, DTR, RTS, CTS) are not supported by SIM.
The data are acknowledged at procedure level.
SIM Computer
TxD
RxD
E–
D–
D+
E+
Cable length
Max. of 1000 m
Pin 1
1) Apply shield to connector housing
2) Jumper between pin 1 and pin 12 = RS 422 interface
1)
2nd
Figure 6-72 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 422
The interface switchover from RS 232/RS 422 takes place via
the E1 input (pin 12).
Logical “0” is RS 232
Logical “1” is RS 422
Standard cabling
with RS 232
interface
Standard cabling
with RS 422
interface
Interfaces
6-97
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
SIM
1
Relay, small power mo-
tor, light or similar
230 V AC
24 V DC
+–
Switch,
BERO
DI0
Imax = 500 mA
DPA0
Cable length
max. 100 m
(shielded or unshielded)
E1 1)
1) Input 1 (pin 12) is only used for interface switchover and is not
available to the user for applications
Logical “0” is RS 232
Logical “1” is RS 422
Figure 6-73 DI/DO cabling with power supply
!Warning
If DPA0 (i.e. power output) is used, PIN 10 must be used as ground refer-
ence. Otherwise the SIM may be destroyed.
a) Check the supply voltage directly on the SIM connector using a measu-
ring instrument.
b) Check the cabling to the PC
Do the SIM and PC have the same physical interface?
Is the polarity of the connecting cable correct (RS 232 and RS 422)?
Are the data cables correctly wired?
(RxD of the SIM must be connected to TxD of the PC and vice versa)
Is the cable shield applied correctly?
Error messages are described in the individual programming guides.
DI/DO cabling with
power supply and
interface
switchover
What should you
do if nothing
works?
Error messages
Interfaces
6-98 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10.3 Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure
Telegrams can only be transmitted with the 3964R procedure. This procedure
ensures secure data transmission for a point-to-point connection.
The following C libraries and programming guides which can be ordered sep-
arately are available to the user for the computers.
C libraries
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0)
Programming guide for
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) German
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) English
PC users:
3964R driver for Windows 95/NT 4.0 users;
works with PC interface 1 and/or 2;
four interfaces can be operated with the driver using additional hardware.
Can be run on PC models as of 80486SX with a serial interface and a Win-
dows 95/NT 4.0 operating system.
The communication specifications are described in the Windows program-
ming guidelines (CCT 32, Windows 95/NT) for computers which do not use
Windows (e.g., Unix).
Note
The MOBY API library is not suitable for the SIM 7x.
Parameter Presetting
Transmission speed 9600 bit/sec
Bits per character 8 data bits
Parity Odd
Stop bits 1
Priority PC = master
Depending on the operating system being used, these interface parameters
must be set in the C library using Control Panel (in the case of
Windows 95/NT, button: 3964R/Run).
Interface
presetting
Interfaces
6-99
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10.4 SIM 70 ANT 0
Figure 6-74 SIM 70 ANT 0
Table 6-37 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0
Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 0 6GT2 305-0AA00
15-pin subminiature D special connector
(socket) for IP65
6GT2 390-1AA00
SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line
for DI/DO and connection for power supply
(total length of 5 m)
6GT2 391-1DH50
Plug-in power pack,
primary: 90 V to 264 V AC
secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIM-
RS 232 test cable
6GT2 090-0HB00
Software See Section 7.1
Programming guide See appendix A
Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0
Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422
Transmission speed 9600 bps
Procedure 3964R
(C library contains driver for PC)
Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on
device side)
Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422
30 m (shielded), RS 232
Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-100 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0
Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access
rights, multitag (see programming
guide)
Programming
The following C libraries are available
for the PC.
Depends on computer, PC, PLC of
other manufacturer
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0)
Digital input (Ri = 10 kΩ)
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Non-floating
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1
– 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1
12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1
Yes
Digital outputs
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Galvanic isolation
Short-circuit immunity
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1 (power output)
Imax = 500 mA
At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V)
< 2 V at 50 Ω
22 V at 50 Ω (Imax)
No
Yes
Inductive interface to the MDS
(SLG integrated)
Read/write distance, max 15 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC
12 to 30 V DC 1
Current consumption at room temperature
Without DO
Inrush current, brief
Operation (at 12 V)
Operation (at 24 V)
700 mA, typical
330 mA, typical
180 mA, typical
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Housing, dimensions in mm
for antenna head (∅ x weight x L)
For electronics without connector
(L x W x H)
Color (Antenna)
(SIM housing)
Material (Antenna)
(SIM housing)
M18 x 1.0 x 50
160 x 80 x 40
Anthracite with orange head
Anthracite
Crastin
Polyamide 12
Interfaces
6-101
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
SIM housing
Antenna
IP65 (using a special plug:
6GT2 390-1AA00)
IP67 (front)
Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)2
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)2
Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2
Mounting of the SIM
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
Mounting of the antenna
2 M5 screws
≥ 2 Nm
2 plastic nuts, M18 x 1.5
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
Weight (approx.) 510 g
1 Voltage measured on SIM
2Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must
not occur continuously.
Interfaces
6-102 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Da ≥ 200 mm
Db ≥ 200 mm
The SIM electronics can be mounted
directly next to each other.
Db
Da
Figure 6-75 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0
50
M18
Fine thread
Gradient 1.0
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length
0.45 m
Anti-kink cable protector, fle-
xible in all directions
Antenna
head
Antenna
side
Top view of
antenna head
24
MOBY E
ANT 0
160
5
5
80
40
52
A
View A
26
12 33
∅5.5
Figure 6-76 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 0
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Interfaces
6-103
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
L (Sa, max) = Ld
Top view
Ld
sg
sa
Side view
1 With Sa, min the transmission
window can increase in size compared
to the standard configuration
L (Sa, min) 1
Figure 6-77 Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 0
Transmission window:
The antenna of the MDS must be positioned inside this field to ensure
reliable data communication.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
aMOBY E
ANT 0
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
Metal-free space with flush
installation
Note:
The limit and working distances are
reduced when the metal-free space is
not adhered to.
10
10
ANT 0
Figure 6-78 Metal-free space for the SIM 70 ANT 0
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 0
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT0
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
FCC information
Interfaces
6-104 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10.5 SIM 70 ANT 1
Figure 6-79 SIM 70 ANT 1
Table 6-39 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1
Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 1 6GT2 305-0AB00
15-pin subminiature D special connector
(socket) for IP65
6GT2 390-1AA00
SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line
for DI/DO and connection for power supply
(total length of 5 m)
6GT2 391-1DH50
Plug-in power pack,
primary: 90 V to 264 V AC
secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for
SIM-RS 232 test cable
6GT2 090-0HB00
Software See Section 7.1
Programming guide See appendix A
Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1
Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422
Transmission speed 9600 bps
Procedure 3964R
(C library contains driver for PC)
Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on
device side)
Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422
30 m (shielded), RS 232
Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-105
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1
Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access
rights, multitag (see programming
guide)
Programming
The following C libraries are available
for the PC:
Depends on computer, PC, PLC of
other manufacturer
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0)
Digital input (Ri = 10 kΩ)
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Non-floating
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1
– 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1
12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1
Yes
Digital outputs
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Galvanic isolation
Short-circuit immunity
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1 (power output)
Imax = 500 mA
At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V)
< 2 V at 50 Ω
22 V at 50 Ω (Imax)
No
Yes
Inductive interface to the MDS
(SLG integrated)
Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC
12 to 30 V DC 1
Current consumption at room temperature
Without DO
Inrush current, brief
Operation (at 12 V)
Operation (at 24 V)
700 mA, typical
330 mA, typical
180 mA, typical
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Housing, dimensions in mm
For antenna head (L x W x H)
For electronics without connector
(L x W x H)
Color (Antenna)
(SIM housing)
Material (Antenna)
(SIM housing)
75 x 75 x 20
160 x 80 x 40
Anthracite
Anthracite
Polyamide 12
Polyamide 12
Interfaces
6-106 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
SIM housing
Antenna
IP65 (using a special plug:
6GT2 390-1AA00)
IP67
Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)2
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)2
Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2
Mounting of the SIM
Mounting of the antenna
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
2 M5 screws
2 M5 screws
≥ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to + 70 °C
–40 °C to + 85 °C
Weight (approx.) 620 g
1 Voltage measured on SIM
2Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must
not occur continuously.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
SgSide view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
SIM 70ANT 1
Sa
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa, min) 1
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa,max) = Ld1 With Sa, min the transmission
window can increase in size
compared to the standard
configuration
Figure 6-80 Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 1
Transmission
window
Interfaces
6-107
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal-free space with flush mounting
a = 40 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 20 mm (non-metallic base)
Figure 6-81 Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 1
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 1
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT1
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Metal-free space
FCC information
Interfaces
6-108 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Da
Db
SIM 70
ANT 1
SIM 70
ANT 1
SIM 70
ANT 1
Da > 800 mm
Db > 800 mm
Figure 6-82 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1
75
52 Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length
0.45 m
Anti-kink cable protector,
flexible in all directions
160
5
80
5
5
5
A
View A
26
12 33
40
20
Top view
of antenna
∅ 5.5
∅ 5.5
Figure 6-83 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 1
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Interfaces
6-109
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6.10.6 SIM 72
Figure 6-84 SIM 72
Table 6-41 Ordering data for the SIM 72
SIM 72 serial interface 6GT2 305-0CA00
15-pin subminiature D special connector
(socket) for IP65
6GT2 390-1AA00
SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line
for DI/DO and connection for power supply
(total length of 5 m)
6GT2 391-1DH50
Plug-in power pack,
primary: 90 V to 264 V AC
secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for
SIM-RS 232 test cable
6GT2 090-0HB00
Software See Section 7.1
Programming guide See appendix A
Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72
Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422
Transmission speed 9600 bps
Procedure 3964R
(C library contains driver for PC)
Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on
device side)
Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422
30 m (shielded), RS 232
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-110 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72
Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access
rights, multitag (see programming
guide)
Programming
The following C libraries are available for the
PC:
Depends on computer, PC, PLC of
other manufacturer
CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0)
Digital inputs (Ri = 10 kΩ)
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Non-floating
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1
– 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1
12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1
Yes
Digital outputs
Number
Input voltage for
Logical “0”
Logical “1”
Galvanic isolation
Short-circuit immunity
Via 15-pin subminiature D connector
1 (power output)
Imax = 500 mA
At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V)
< 2 V at 50 Ω
22 V at 50 Ω (Imax)
No
Yes
Inductive interface to the MDS
(SLG integrated)
Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC
12 to 30 V DC 1
Current consumption at room temperature
Without DO
Inrush current, brief
Operation (at 12 V)
Operation (at 24 V)
700 mA, typical
330 mA, typical
180 mA, typical
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 105 hours
Housing, dimensions in mm
For electronics without connector
(L x W x H)
Color
Material
160 x 80 x 40
Anthracite
Polyamide 12
Protection rating in accordance with
EN 60529
IP65 (using a special plug:
6GT2 390-1AA00)
Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)2
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)2
Interfaces
6-111
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72
Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7,
class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2
Mounting of the SIM
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
2 M5 screws
≥ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
Weight (approx.) 550 g
1 Voltage measured on SIM
2Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must
not occur continuously.
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Sg
Side view
Transmission window MDS
Top view
SIM 72
M
Standard
configuration:
longitudinal
x-axis (Lx)
70
Ly (Sa, min) 1
Sa
Sa
Sa
Sa
1 With Sa, min the transmission window can increase in size compared
to the standard configuration
Lx (Sa, min) 1
Lx (Sa, max) = LxLy (Sa, max) = Ly
Figure 6-85 Transmission window of the SIM 72
Transmission
window
Interfaces
6-112 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Metal
h = physical height of SIM
h
b
Metal
a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm
b
a
a
Figure 6-86 Metal-free space of the SIM 72
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 72
FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM72
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Metal-free space
FCC information
Interfaces
6-113
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Da
Db
SIM 72SIM 72
SIM 72
Da ≥ 800 mm
Db ≥ 800 mm
X
Y
X
Y
X
Y
Figure 6-87 Distance D: SIM 72
90
5
5
80 40
X
Y
160
70
A
View A
26
12 33
∅ 5.5
Figure 6-88 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 72
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Interfaces
6-114 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Interfaces
7-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Accessories 7
7-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7.1 MOBY Software
Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product is delivered on CD.
It includes all function blocks and drivers for MOBY. The “readme” file in
the main directory of the CD offers a short description of the programs.
FB 240: function block for the ASM 450. MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with
SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP).
FB 250: function block for the ASM 400.
The FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The FB has an
almost identical call interface to the FB 250. When programming, use the
description for the FB 250.
FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment.
Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully.
The description of FC 44 for ASM 450 is available for operation of
ASM 450.
FC 45: S7 function for the ASM 754
Function FC 47 for ASM 470
FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5 115U - 155U. This
enables you to operate the ASM 470 via an ET 200M in a SIMATIC S5
environment.
Load program for the ES 030 and a master device file for connecting the
ES 030 to PROFIBUS DP
Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (such as
“read from MDS” or “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (Windows). The
ASM 424/724 and SIM MOBY modules are connected to the PC by a
serial interface cable (i.e. COM1 or COM2).
Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. See
“les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”.
3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT.
C-library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT 4.0.
C-library MOBY API for Windows 98/NT 4.0.
Current release of MOBY documentation in pdf format.
Tools: Useful programs for MOBY configuration.
A
ccessories
7-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The “Software MOBY” CD has user-friendly operator prompting using
HTML. After calling Start.exe, a window appears with the following entries
in the upper menu bar:
FC for S7
FB for S5
PC Support
Documentation
Tools
Demo
News
Note
on MOBY software and licensing
When you buy an interface module or SIM no software or documentation is
included with the product. The “MOBY software” CD-ROM, which con-
tains all the available FBs/FCs for SIMATIC, C libraries for Win-
dows 98/NT, demo programs, etc., has to be ordered separately. The CD-
ROM also includes the complete set of MOBY documentation (German,
English and French) in PDF format.
When you purchase an ASM or SIM interface module, the price for use of
the software including documentation on the “MOBY Software” CD-ROM is
included. The purchaser is granted the right to make copies (duplication li-
cense) as needed for customer applications or system development for the
plant.
The enclosed contract also applies to the use of software products for a
one-off charge.
Operator promp-
ting
A
ccessories
7-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The import library is written in C++.
The following functions are supported.
Read MDS
Initialize MDS
Write MDS
Password protection and access rights
Multi-tag recognition
Personalization of the cards
(only with the hardware of the MIFARE demo kit)
Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol.
For a description of the functions, see applicable programming instructions.
See also appendix A.
In addition, the C library Windows 95/NT contains a simple demo program.
The import library is written in C++.
The following functions are supported.
Read MDS
Initialize MDS
Write MDS
Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol.
The programming guide is available as a pdf file on the “MOBY Software”
CD.
Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software
Order No.
MOBY software 6GT2 080-2AA10
C-library
CCT32
C-library
MOBY API
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply
The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power
supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks
with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited).
Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the fine-
tuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic
interference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation.
A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply
against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance.
The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the
connected electronics from excessively high voltage.
Figure 7-1 MOBY wide-range power supply
Table 7-2 Ordering data for the MOBY wide-range power pack
Order No.
Wide-range power supply unit MOBY, AC 100 -
230 V/DC 24 V/2.2 A; including 2 mating con-
nectors for the output voltage
24 V plug-in line for ASM 424, ASM 454,
ASM 724, ASM 754;
Length 5 m
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
Table 7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Input
Input voltage
Rated value
Range
Frequency
Input current
Efficiency
Power supply
Power failure bypass
Undervoltage switchoff
Overvoltage protection
100 to 230 V AC
90 to 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
0.85 to 0.45 A
≥ 80% at full load
2 m power cable with ground-pro-
tected connector
≥ 10 ms
Yes
SIOV
Description
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply
Output
Nominal output voltage
Nominal output current
Residual ripple
Startup current limitation
Permanent short-circuit proof
Socket contacts
24 V DC
2.2 A
20 mVss to 160 kHz
50 mVss Greater than
160 kHz
NTC
Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
Cooling
–20 C to +40 C
(max. +60 °C;
see Safety Guidelines)
–40 C to +80 C
Convection
General information
Dimensions for power supply incl. mounting
plate, (L x W x H) in mm
Weight
Color
205 x 80 x 60
(without connector)
Approx. 1000 g
anthracite
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emitted interference (EN 50081-1)
Noise immunity (EN 50082-2)
Class B in accordance with
EN 55022
EN 61000-4-2
Safety
Certificates and approvals
Electrical safety test
Primary/secondary isolation
Safety class to EN 60950 (VDE 0805)
Degree of protection to EN 60529
CE, GS
EN 60950/VDE 0805 and
VDE 106 part 1
4 kV AC
I
IP65 (only in inserted state)
2
3
1
4
Output 1 and 2:
Socket 1: ground (0 V)
Socket 2: +24 V DC
Socket 3: +24 V DC
Socket 4: ground (0 V)
Figure 7-2 Connector pin assignment 24 V output
Connector pin
assignment 24 V
output
A
ccessories
7-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
80
7,5 65
190
7,5
176
205
573
5 5
Figure 7-3 Dimensions of the MOBY wide-range power supply
!Caution
Do not open the devices or modify them.
Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer’s war-
ranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE
regulations of your country.
The field of application of the power supply unit is limited to information
technology in electrical office equipment within the scope of
EN 60950/VDE 0805.
A device can only be set up and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are
those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices,
systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The de-
vice may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and tech-
nical description and only in connection with devices and components rec-
ommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers
are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct operation of the product requires proper storage, setup and mount-
ing, and careful operator control and maintenance.
When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily ac-
cessed. During operation, the housing may heat up to +40 °C. This is no
cause for concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40°C,
be sure to cover the power pack so that people cannot touch the hot housing.
The power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Safety guidelines
A
ccessories
7-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7.3 Wide-Range Connector Power Pack
The MOBY wide-range connector power pack is designed for use on single-
phase alternating current networks with a DC output (socket connector). The
primary-pulsed power supply is protected against overload with a built-in
current limitation circuit and is permanently immune to short-circuiting. The
integrated overvoltage protection protects the connected electronics from
excessively high voltages.
Table 7-4 Technical data of the wide-range connector power pack
Input voltage range
Frequency range of the input volt-
age
Nominal input current
90 V to 264 V AC (wide-range input)
47 Hz to 63 Hz
700 mA
Nominal output voltage
Nominal output current
Basic load
Short-circuit immunity
24 V DC
1.25 A
None
Yes
Ambient temperature for trans-
portation, storage and operation
0 °C to +40 °C with 90% humidity, no con-
densation
Power supply
dimensions in mm (L x W x H)
Output cable
Primary connector can be
changed
Housing material
Color
Weight
105 x 68 x 39 (without connector)
2 x 0.75 mm / 2 m in length
Euro connector, UK connector, USA connector
(included)
Plastic (PPEV1)
Black
Approx. 260 g
CE
UL
Yes
Yes
Interference emission
Interference immunity
EN 55011, 55014 and 55022/B
EN 61000-4-2 to -4-6
Electrical safety test
Galvanic isolation,
primary/secondary
Safety class to EN 60950
(VDE 0805)
Protection rating in accordance
with EN 60529
In accordance with EN 60950
3 kV AC
2
IP30
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-5 Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in power pack
Order No.
Wide-range, plug-in power pack,
90 - 264 V AC/24 V DC; 1.25 A
Connecting cable, RS 232
PC ↔ SIM
6GT2 090-0HB00
6GT2 391-1DH50
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7.4 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal
The STG E adds to the MOBY E identification system a powerful mobile
hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and
service. The service and test device (STG E) is an indispensable aid for com-
missioning and testing. All MOBY E data memories can be read and write-
accessed inductively.
Figure 7-4 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal
The STG E mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (PSION
Workaboutmx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a housing which
is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor screen with
240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for
EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY E read head, bat-
tery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on).
The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test func-
tions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY E data memories.
Read data from the data memory
Write data to the data memory
Read and display the ID number of the data memory
Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format
Enable/disable password protection
Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own
applications including a customized screen user interface for reading and
writing data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC,
and a large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New
applications are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g.,
goods commissioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held termi-
nal or processed and forwarded to the PC/computer later).
Application areas
Setup and function
A
ccessories
7-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
See http //www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet.
3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and
PSION Workaboutmx
PSION Workaboutmx basic device with large function keys and numeric
keyboard
Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory
Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for
convenient data exchange between PSION Workaboutmx and PC
The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ‘C’
(SIBO ‘C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is
used.
PC The C development package for PSION Workabout
must be installed on the PC. You can obtain the
development package directly from PSION (see:
http://www.psion.com/industrial/).
Hand-held terminal PSION Workabout with wall attachment and power
supply unit.
If you prefer, you can use the
MOBY STG E hand-held terminal.
PC cable You will need a 3-link adapter cable from PSION
for the connection to the PC
(see: http://www.psion.com/industrial/). The cable is
only required if it is not included in the C
development package.
C library The following files are required: MOBY_E.H,
MOBY_STG.LIB. They are delivered with the
MOBY SIBO C library from Siemens.
Note
In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming
language OVAL. However, you cannot use the MOBY library.
Optional
components
System
prerequisites
A
ccessories
7-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can
use to write your own applications.
ASCII keyboard, shift and special function
keys (Ctrl, )
Cursor control keys; contrast; display
illumination; on/off; cursor keys
Additional Flash memory cards for storing
large amounts of data
TTL interface for use of a
MOBY read head
RS 232 interface
(e.g. connection of a MOBY E-SIM)
Graphical LCD screen
LIF interface for connection of PC,
printer and so on
Numeric input block with Enter key
Green LED: on when battery is being charged
Figure 7-5 Hardware of the STG E
If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also
available. A few examples are listed below.
Infrared interface
Numeric keyboard and function keys
Hardware
A
ccessories
7-13
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-6 Ordering data for the STG E
STG E mobile hand-held terminal, basic device
(PSION Workaboutmx), with MOBY E read/
write head, battery, standard software incl. STG
functions on EEPROM card, user’s guide, wi-
thout charging station
Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal
with 230 V AC, plug-in power pack
6GT2 303-0AA00
6GT2 303-1DA00
Accessories:
MOBY E read/write head, 13.56 MHz, without
software and description
Memory card with STG software and filehandler
software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U,
incl. user’s guide
C-library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, for development
of customer-specific screen dialogs, without
development tools, incl. description
6GT2 303-1AA00
6GT2 303-1CA00
6GT2 381-1AB00
Extra battery
Additional PSION components (e.g.,
3link cable and C developmental user interface)
6GT2 094-0AB00 or
2 x AA batteries
(NiCd, Ni-MH, alkaline)
Obtainable from local dealers or
PSION
(http://www.psion.com/industrial/)
Table 7-7 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal
Hardware
Processor
RAM memory
ROM memory
User program
NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz, 80C86-compatible
2 MB; of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired
2 Mbytes for operating system
1 MB with MOBY service and test program
Monitor screen
Keyboard
Sound
Graphic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels,
graystage scale, backlighting can be turned on
Alphanumeric with 57 keys
Piezo signal encoder
Power supply
Operation time
NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh)
High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off
20 hours
(Read head inactive, display not lighted)
4.5 hours
(Read head active, display not lighted)
10 hours
(Read head inactive, display lighted)
Interfaces LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging
and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not inclu-
ded)
RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read
head
Security Locking mechanism for battery and program memory
Software
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-7 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal
Operating system
File management
EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface, Inter-
preter similar to MS-DOS
MS-DOS-compatible
Integrated
software
MOBY STG
program
MOBY service and test program spreadsheet;
database; calculator; communication
Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS ID; store and load MDS
data; German or English menu language; data input and dis-
play in ASCII or HEX
Technical data Complete device
(incl. ACCUs)
Read head
Dimensions 260 x 90 x 35 [mm] 90 x 64 x 35 [mm]
Weight
[]
Approx. 440 g
[]
Approx. 110 g
Temperature Operation: –20 °C to +60 °C
Stora
g
e: –25 °C to +80 °C
(
without batter
y)
Relative humidity
Pi i i
Storage:
–
25 C to +80 C (without battery)
0% to 90%, no condensation
IP54 ( d i l h d )
Protection rating in
accordance with
60529
IP54 (protected against splashed water)
EN 60529
Im
p
act resistance Max. dro
p
on concrete: 1 m
Impact resistance
EMC
El t t ti RF
Max
.
drop on concrete: 1 m
EN 55022; FCC Part 15 Low Power Transmitter
IEC 801 2 IEC 801 3 IEC 801 4
Electrostatic; RF;
EFT
IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4
RF read/write head
MOBY E 13.56 MHz (MIFARE)
Max. read/write
di t
MDS type Distance in mm
distances E611
E600
E624
E623
E623, installed in metal
30
18
10
5
3
A
ccessories
7-15
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
7.5 Acquisition Station ES 030-K
Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for ge-
neral-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces. This
station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I, E, L and M identifi-
cation systems and with barcodes to reduce the load on higher-level host sy-
stems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and design to
meet the requirements of individual applications.
Can be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language
STEP5
Dialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired
Sturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control
even when operator is wearing protective gloves)
Flexible hardware layout
Serial interfaces; TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), V.24 for connection to higher-
level computers, PLCs or printer with run, 3964R, SINEC L1 and
PROFIBUS DP procedures
Additional interfaces for MOBY I, MOBY E and MOBY L identification
systems, barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers
Integrated function blocks for frequently used functions
With master/slave function for SINEC L1
Application area
Features/layout
A
ccessories
7-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Connector 3
LCD display
2 x 24 characters
LCD display
4 x 20 characters
Keyboard with
29 lighted keys
key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard with
30 keys, 30 LEDs
key-operated switch
Clock chip
MOBY I, MOBY E
SLG interface
Barcode wand
Serial interface
TTY and X.27
8 digital inputs/
8 digital outputs 2
Serial expansion interface
TTY and V.24 2
8 digital inputs/
8 digital outputs
16 digital inputs 2
MOBYI, MOBY E
SLG interface
Connector 4
Connector 1
Connector 2
MOBYI file handler
SLG interface
MOBY L
SLG interface
MOBYL
SLG interface
MOBY I file handler
SLG interface
O P T I O NO P T I O NO P T I O N
PLUGĆINĆOPTION
PROFIBUS DP
interface
PROFIBUS DP
interface
PLUGĆINĆOPTION
1
1
Figure 7-6 Configurator of ES 030-K
1 Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K.
2 The options “serial expansion interface” and “16 digital inputs” can also be led out on connector 2 as a special version.
A
ccessories
7-17
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-8 Ordering data for the ES 030-K
ES 030-K acquisition station
with TTY, X.27 serial interface
on connector 1
8 DI + 8 DO on connector 2
Display
without Display
LCD 2 x 24 characters
LCD 4 x 20 characters
Connector 3
Not used
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
8 DI + 8 DO
16 DI
MOBY I file handler
MOBY L interface
PROFIBUS DP interface1
serial interface (TTY, V.24)
Connector 4
Not used
Barcode (incl. wand)
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
MOBY I file handler
MOBY L interface
Barcode (without wand)
PROFIBUS DP interface1
Keyboard
No keyboard
Sealed keyboard, 30 keys, 30 LEDs
Keyboard with 29 illuminated keys
Loading kit for ES 030
Order No.
6AW5 451- 3
0
1
2
A
C
D
E
F
L
P
S
A
B
C
F
L
N
P
0
2
3
6AW5 451-8AU
1 Alternatively: preferably on connector 4.
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-9 Technical data of the ES 030-K
Microprocessor 80C32
Clock pulse frequency
M it f th b i it
14.7 MHz
Memory capacity of the basic unit
EEPROM
32 Kbytes = 16 K instructions
EEPROM
RAM
32 Kb
ytes
=
16 K i
nstruct
i
ons
128 Kb
y
tes batter
y
buffer
RAM
128 Kbytes battery buffer
for approx. 8 years (DB1-DB120)
Command set (STEP5) Almost as for the SIMATIC 100U:
e.g. logic instructions,
storage operations,
load and transfer operations,
time and counting operations,
comparison operations,
and processing operations
Display 2 x 24-character LCD or
4 x 20-character LCD
Digital input/output
Always present:
8 DI and 8 DO isolated
Al
ways
presen
t
:
Optional module:
Optional module:
8 DI
an
d 8 DO
,
i
so
l
a
t
e
d
8 DI and 8 DO, isolated
16 DI and 8 DO isolated
Optional module:
Di
g
ital in
p
ut
16 DI,and 8 DO, isolated
lo
g
ical „0”: –2 to +2 V
Digital input
logical
„
0 : 2 to +2 V
logical „1”: 16 to 33 V
logical„1
”
:(Ri
=
approx.5 kΩ)
Di i l
logical
„
1”: (Ri
=
approx
.
5 kΩ)
Shared grounding of all DI
Digital output
gg
logical „1”: +24 V
I
=
100 mA
I
=
100 mA
I = 50 mA
Sh i i f
Short-circuit proof
Shared +24 V of all DO
Serial interface
(connector 1)
TTY or RS 485
(
connec
t
or
1)
Procedure
Velocity
TTY
or
RS 485
3964R, run, SINEC L1
150 to 19200 bps
Velocity
Serial interface
150 to 19200 bps
Interface module
Serial interface
(Socket 3)
Interface module
20 mA single current
active/passive or V.24
active/passive or V
.
24
procedure: run or 3964R
Field bus PROFIBUS DP (slave) certified in accor-
dance with
p
art III of DIN 19245
Transmission speed
Ci
dance with part III of DIN 19245
9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps
9i bii D
Connection 9-pin subminiature D connector on
connector 4 (optional on connector 3)
Barcode interface (max. 2)
can be connected
Reading wand swipe reader hand
-
held
can
b
e
connec
t
e
d
R
ea
di
ng
wan
d
,
sw
i
pe
rea
d
er,
h
an
d
-
h
e
ld
laser scanner
MOBY E
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 72
SLG 75 ANT 12
SLG 75 ANT 30
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-19
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table 7-9 Technical data of the ES 030-K
MOBY I
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 40/SLG 40-S
SLG 41/SLG 41-S/SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
MOBY L
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 52
Connection to SIMATIC S5 RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1
Keyboard
Momentary
-
contact keyboard
29 keys illuminated
M
omen
t
ary-con
t
ac
t k
ey
b
oar
d
29 k
eys,
ill
um
i
na
t
e
d
1 key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard 30 keys, 30 LEDs, 1 key-operated switch
Power supply, normal
Optional
230 V AC ± 10 %; 48-62 Hz
24 V DC (20 30 V)
Optional
Current consumption
24 V DC (20-30 V)
approx. 20 VA
Current consumption
RAM/clock backup
approx
.
20 VA
Backup battery for approx. 8 years
Radio interference suppression Interference class B in accordance with
VDE 0871
Protection rating in accordance with
60529
IP54
g
EN 60529
Abi
Ambient temperature
During operation
0
°
C to +40
°
C
D
ur
i
ng
opera
ti
on
Durin
g
trans
p
ortation and stora
g
e
0 °C t
o
+
40 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
During transportation and storage
Rel. air humidity
40 C to +70 C
up to 95%
Rel. air humidity
Housing
up to 95%
Zinc die-casting
Housing
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Zinc die casting
180 x 280 x 95
Weight (approx.) 5 kg
A
ccessories
7-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ES 030-K
Basic configuration with
8 DI/DO and serial
interface, without display
and without keyboard,
for example, to control
a point
Serial interface/RS422
SIMATIC S5/CP544
Serial
interface
TTY
O0.1
MDS
SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDS
ES 030-K
Basic configuration with
8 DI/DO and serial
interface, with LCD
and membrane keyboard
and MOBY E, I or L
for quality data
ES 030-K (slave only)
PLC
(master)
PROFIBUS DP
Station
120 Station
14
Serial
connection
barcode
scanner DI/DO Manual input
SIMATIC S5/S7
D
P
ES 030-K
PC
(master)
L1
Type2 Type3
Serial
connection
barcode
scanner
DI/DO Manual input
L1 L1
ES 030-K
Basic configuration with
8 DI/DO and serial
interface, with LCD and
momentary-contact keys or
membrane keyboard
Serial interface PC/PLC
O0.1
O0.0I0.0
TTY/RS485
e.g.
Station
11
ES 030-K
Basic configuration with
serial interface
(L1), with LCD display,
sealed keyboard,
barcode scanner pen
MOBY I-
interface
Barcode
L1
SLG
MDS
1234567
Figure 7-7 Configuration example ES 030-K
A
ccessories
A-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Documentation
Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available
electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD with the order number
6GT2 080-2AA10.
Description ASM 400/401 (German/English)
Description ASM 410 (German/English)
Description ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French)
Description FC 45 (German/English/French)
Description ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English)
Description ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English)
Description FB 240 (German/English)
Description FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English)
Description 3964 R for Windows 95/NT (German/English)
Description T3964R for DOS (German/English)
Description MOBY API (German/English)
Description C/C++-library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT (German/English)
Operator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German) (also included with STG E)
Programming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German)
Equipment manual for ES 030-K (German/English)
Technical
descriptions
Operator control
guides
Manuals
A
A-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Documentation
B-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Error Messages
This chapter contains a list of MOBY I, E error messages. These messages
are divided into three groups.
B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section.
These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS
addressing.
B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240 and FC 47) provide addi-
tional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages
are description in the second section.
B
B-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
B.1 General Errors
The following error codes can occur during MOBY I, E operation. They are
transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red
LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates
the last error even when this error has already been corrected.
On ASM 450, the error codes can also be optionally reported via PROFIBUS
as device-related diagnoses.
Error Messa
g
es
B-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-1 General Errors
Error Code
in Hex
LED Cause/Remedy SIN1
00
–
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
02
02
03
04
05
no error; result is ok
See error code 0F
Presence error: MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The
MOBY command could only be executed partially.
Read command: No data are supplied to the computer.
Write command: The data memory which just left the field
contains an incomplete data record.
Sa (working distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to
Configuration error: the data block to be processed is too large (in dynamic
operation).
The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next
MDS.
Note:
The error display with the red LED on the front panel issues the error code 02 in
this case.
Presence error.
A mobile data memory has passed the SLG and was not processed
with a command or concluded with the NEXT command.
An INIT command was aborted with RESET.
This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, sta-
tus, RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error
message. The ASM executes the next command correctly again.
Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis.
Note:
The error output with the red error LED does not differentiate between error 01
and 02 (see error code 01).
Errors in the connection to the SLG
Supply voltage of the ASM < 20 V or not connected
24 V power has dips
Fuse on the ASM has blown Check wiring
Cable wired incorrectly between the ASM and SLG or broken cable
Defective hardware: ASM or SLG
Other SLG active nearby
Error in memory of the MDS
The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a
battery failure.
Initialize data memory with the STG
With the ASM: call the initialization command
Check battery of MDS or change MDS (battery bit)
Data memory is defective
Initialization was executed with incorrect memory size
– Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram
– MDS reports address error (check message frame)
0000
0003
0005
0040
0041
0002/
0004
Error Messa
g
es
B-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-1 General Errors
Error Code
in Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
06
07
08
09
0 A
0B
0C
0D
0E
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Field interference on SLG
The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings.
External interference field. The interference field can be documented with the
”inductive field indicator” of the STG!
The distance between two SLGs is too small and does not adhere to the
configuration guidelines!
The connecting cable to the SLG is defective, too long or does not meet
specifications.
Too many sending errors
The MDS was unable to receive the command or the write data from the SLG even
after several attempts.
The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission
window
Data transmission to the MDS is being bothered by external interference.
CRC transmission error.
– The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending.
Cause of error same as for error 06
– The MDS very often reports a CRC error
The MDS is positioned in the tolerance range of the SLG
The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect
Only at initialization: CRC error when acknowledgment received by MDS
Cause of error same as for error 06
Only at initialization: MDS cannot execute the INIT command
The MDS is defective.
Only at initialization: timeout at initialization of the MDS
The MDS is positioned directly in the tolerance range of the transmission
window
The MDS is using too much current (defective).
Memory of the MDS cannot be written.
Memory of the MDS is defective.
The EEPROM of the MDS was written too often and has reached the end of its
life.
An incorrect end address was parameterized with the INIT command
Address error (address area exceeded)
Specified address doesn’t exist on the MDS.
Check and correct command for message frame structure.
The status byte in the command does not have the value 00
ECC error
The data cannot be read from the MDS.
MDS data have been lost (MDS defective).
The MDS was not initialized with ECC driver.
Initialize MDS
MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been
lost.
Replace MDS.
The MDS moved out of the field while being written.
The MDS is positioned incorrectly.
0044
0045
0044
-
-
-
0046
0002/
0004
0047
Error Messa
g
es
B-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-1 General Errors
Error Code
in Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
0F
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
01
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
Startup message
The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered
performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated,
after a reset via connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retained
until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to reco-
gnize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e. readiness for operation).
NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted.
ASM working without presence check
ASM has already received a NEXT command
Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs
Next command must be a RESET command.
The affected output is switched off
All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs
Reset can only be performed by turning the power off and on again.
Internal ASM communication error
The connection to the MOBY processor is defective. The next command must be
a RESET command.
Hardware of ASM defective
EMC interference
Internal ASM error
Stack overflow. The next command must be a RESET command.
Turn 24 V power off and on again.
Incorrect operational parameter assignment
Check the switch on the ASM
The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration.
Input or output areas are too small for the size of the message frame.
Write or read command too long
Adapt bus configuration on the master module.
Handshake error
Next command must be a RESET command.
The user has set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the message frame
during the handshake process
Check user program and correct.
Only RESET command permissible
An error has occurred that must be acknowledged by a RESET command
1043
Error Messa
g
es
B-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-1 General Errors
Error Code
in Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
19
1 A
1E
1F
20
(binary
xx1x xxxx)
40
(binary
x1xx xxxx)
80
(binary
1xxx xxxx)
25
26
30
31
32
64
128
Previous command active
A new command was sent to the ASM although the last command is still active.
An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command.
The new command was terminated with error 19 hex and the old command is
executed by the ASM and reported after processing as completed.
PROFIBUS DP error occurred
Bus connection interrupted (wire break, connector removed)
Master won’t address ASM anymore.
Error reported as soon as the bus connection is working again
– The message frame does not have the correct form.
– QB byte does not correspond to user data length.
Check and correct the message frames in the user program.
Communication with the MDS was terminated with RESET. This error can only
be returned with a RESET command.
No error messages!
Only occurs if you are working with the ECC driver turned on. It indicates that the
driver has detected and corrected a 1 bit error. The read/write data are correct.
No error messages!
This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status display of the 2nd
No error message!
Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen beneath the threshold value. We recommend
you replace the MDS immediately!
In MDS variants with EEPROM this status bit is always set.
In SINUMERIK the battery message appears without the “F” identifier in the iden-
tification. The “fnr” field can be evaluated to detect a bad battery at a single point
in the overall system.
0042
-
-
00522
00512
00502
1 SIN = equivalent error number in SIM in operating mode SINUMERIK
2 If several statuses occur at the same time, the following order applies: 0052, 0050, 0051
Error Messa
g
es
B-7
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
B.2 ASM-specific error
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250
The messages listed in Table B-2 are displayed in data word 5 of FBDB.
Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250
Error messages Cause/Remedy
Bit 1 = “1”:
synchronization error
The FB 250 has received the result for a command that is not (at this point) in the
ZUWDB. The pointer (ZUW) may have been changed to ZUWDB while a com-
mand was active.
As a result of EMC interference, the ASM processed a different command to the
one programmed by the user.
Check the whole SIMATIC system; check the grounding concept.
Bit 2 = “1”:
FB 250 is synchronized
(SYNCH)
General communications option with a channel module of the ASM 400 module.
This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameter assignment.
This occurs at the first RESET directly following the initial downloading of the pro-
grams and data blocks. If the RESET command does not work, the bit is not set or
reset.
ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB.
Incorrect address set on the ASM 400
ASM 400 defective
RESET must always be initiated in the case of a reset synchronization bit
Bit 4 = “1”:
parameter assignment er-
ror
The “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values.
The “KAN” parameter is incorrectly specified. Permitted values are 1 or 2.
The “TYP” parameter was incorrectly specified. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5, 6.
The “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”
The command in ZUWDB is not allowed.
Bit 5 = “1”:
ASM error
The exact ASM error is in bit 8 to 15 of DISP
If bit 8 to 15 = 0:
After the command was transferred, the FB did not receive an acknowledgment
from the ASM in time.
After the command was started, FB 250 was not called by the user for longer
than 4 seconds (no cyclical call of the FB).
The user has changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 - DW 24)
(specifically DW 0/1).
Error Messa
g
es
B-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250
Error messages Cause/Remedy
Bit 6 = “1”:
timing error
Monitoring by loop counter triggered in FB 250.
The command data could not, or not completely, be transferred to the ASM 400.
The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. It is possible that the “ADR”
parameter does not correspond to the S3 switch position on the ASM 400.
A length of 0 was transferred for a write command.
The AG parameter is set incorrectly.
The user has changed data in the FBDB (specifically DW 0/1)
Check the ASM 400 hardware, addressing, parameter assignment, and user
program
Bit 7 = “1”:
repetition error
The command to the ASM 400 was repeated
Error in BEST = 0:
After command repetition the command was terminated correctly (no error)
Error in BEST = 1:
There is a communication problem between the ASM and FB250. In spite of the
fact that the command was repeated, it could not be processed correctly.
If the repetition bit is set occasionally, all the hardware must be checked. Special
attention should be paid to the grounding concept.
Bit 8 to 12 Error message in accordance with Table B-1
Bit 13 = “1”: ECC correction carried out
Bit 14 = “1”: Dialog battery under threshold value
Bit 15 = “1”: RAM battery under threshold value
Error Messa
g
es
B-9
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47
The status word in the case of the FC 47 is DBB 6/7.
The status word in the case of the FB 47 is DW 3.
The MOBY errors are displayed in DBB 6 or DL 3 (see Table B-1).
Internal errors of the function block are displayed in DBB 7 or DR 3 (see
Table B-3). The red LED does not flash in the case of these error mes-
sages of FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified as a hexade-
cimal number (HEX) and a fixed-point number (DEC).
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
DISP
(right
byte)
Meaning
02 HEX/
02 DEC
An impermissible command code or command parameter was entered.
Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the
command description
06 HEX/
06 DEC
The command code and acknowledgment code received are not the same.
ASM 470 not correctly parameterized
Internal runtime error
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
07 HEX/
07 DEC
Synchronization error in the execution of FB 47/FC 47
Internal runtime error
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
08 HEX/
08 DEC
The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the
received user data length of the acknowledgment are not the same.
ASM 470 not correctly parameterized
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
09 HEX/
09 DEC
The user data received or written is too long.
ASM 470 not correctly parameterized
Read command: the specified length of the read data is too long (a
maximum of 12 bytes is permissible)
0A HEX/
10 DEC
Read or written user data length too small. User data length is
0 bytes.
Internal runtime error
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
11 HEX/
17 DEC
The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly.
Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly
Then start the RESET command
Error Messa
g
es
B-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
DISP
(right
byte)
Meaning
13 HEX/
19 DEC
FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET is permissible as the next com-
mand.
A RESET was not carried out after a startup message of the ASM 470
A RESET was not carried out after an error message that requires a
RESET as the next command
Then start the RESET command
14 HEX/
20 DEC
Synchronization error between the ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47.
The handshake of the command and acknowledgment message frames
is out of step. There may be a contact problem, or the supply voltage
may be unstable.
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
Then start the RESET command
15 HEX/
21 DEC
The ASM 470 has carried out a startup
There may be a plug-in contact problem of the ASM 470 in the
S7-300
The supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable
Interference pulse
BEDB is overwritten by other program sections
Then start the RESET command
1BH/
27D1
The data field (number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end
of the DATDB (assuming DATDB consists of 256 data words, DW0
to DW255) is smaller than the length defined by the write command
(DR4 in BEDB)
DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length (make DAT-Z smaller)
Reduce the length of the write/read data
Then start the RESET command
1 Can only occur in the case of FB 47
Error Messa
g
es
B-11
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240
The error displays (DISP) of FB 240 take place in data word DW 2 of
BEDB:
The MOBY errors are indicated in accordance with Table B-1 in the data
word on the left (DL 2).
FB-internal errors are indicated in the data word on the right (DR 2). The
red LED does not flash in the case of these error messages of FB 240. The
contents of the byte are specified as binary, a hexadecimal number (H),
and a fixed-point number (D).
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
DISP
(right byte)
Meaning
00000010
(02H/02D)
An impermissible command code or command parameter was entered.
Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the
command description
00000110
(06H/06D)
The command code and acknowledgment code received are not the
same.
Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized ade-
quately
Parameterize the master module correctly
00000111/
(07H/07D)
The length of the acknowledgment received is too large.
Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized ade-
quately (not 32 bytes)
Read command: the specified length of the data to be read is too
large
Parameterize the master module correctly
00001000
(08H/08D)
The parameterized user data length of the read/write command with the
received user data length of the acknowledgment is not identical.
Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized ade-
quately
Parameterize the master module correctly
00001001
(09H/09D)
The user data received is too long.
Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized ade-
quately (not 32 bytes)
Read command: the specified length of the data to be read is too
large
Parameterize the master module correctly
00010001
(11H/17D)
The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly, or the
parameterization in the EPROM of the IM 308-B is incorrect.
Parameterize FB 240 correctly
Parameterize the master module correctly, and check the ADR
parameter, in particular
Then start the RESET command
Error Messa
g
es
B-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
DISP
(right byte)
Meaning
00010011
(13H/19D)
FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permissible as the next com-
mand.
A RESET was not carried out after a startup message of the
ASM 450
A RESET was not carried out after an error message that requires a
RESET as the next command
Then start the RESET command
00010100
(14H/20D)
Synchronization error between the ASM 450 and FB 240.
The handshake of the command and acknowledgment message
frames is out of step. There may be a contact problem, or the sup-
ply voltage may be unstable.
Then start the RESET command
00010101
(15H/21D)
ASM 450 carried out a startup or there was a PROFIBUS DP bus fault.
There may be a plug-in contact problem of the ASM 450 in the
rack
The supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable
Interference pulse at the reset input of the base connector X1
PROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g. bus connection interrupted)
Then start the RESET command
Error Messa
g
es
C-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ASCII Table C
C-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
A
SCII Table
D-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Compatibility
The following table contains a list of all the discontinued components in the
MOBY E range for both customers and service personnel.
You will also find these type designations on each component.
You can use this table in particular to find replacements for models that have
been discontinued.
Table D-1 Compatibility of MOBY E components (as at July 2003)
Type
designation
MLFB-No. Description/note Replace-
ment
type
MLFB-No.
SLG 70 ANT 0 6GT2 301-0AA00 Discontinued as of June 1, 2003
The replacement is compatible as regards
its technical specifications.
Difference:
The antenna cable is 3 m long and can be
plugged in at the side of the SLG.
Note:
The antenna is not included with the
SLG 75. It must be ordered separately.
SLG 75
ANT 18
6GT2 398-1AF00
6GT2 398-1CA00
SLG 70 ANT 1 6GT2 301-0AB00 Discontinued as of June 1, 2003
The replacement is compatible as regards
its technical specifications.
Difference:
The antenna cable is 3 m long and can be
plugged in at the side of the SLG.
Note:
The antenna is not included with the
SLG 75. It must be ordered separately.
SLG 75
ANT 1
6GT2 398-1AF00
6GT2 398-1CB00
D
D-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Com
p
atibilit
y
Index-1
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Index
Numbers
3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-26
6AW5 451-....3, 7-17
6AW5 451-8AU, 7-17
6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-12
6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-17
6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-17
6ES7 194-3AA00-0AA0, 6-58
6ES7 194-3AA00-0BA0, 6-58
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-26
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-26
6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-71
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-60, 6-61
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-60, 6-61
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-61, 6-66
6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0, 6-37, 6-39, 6-79
6GK1 905-0CA00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0CB00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0DA10, 6-58
6GK1 905-0EA00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0EB00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0EC00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0FA00, 6-58
6GK1 905-0FB00, 6-58
6GT2 002-0ED00, 6-58
6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-17
6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-26
6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-26
6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-61
6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-61
6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-70
6GT2 002-2CE00, 6-37
6GT2 002-2EE00, 6-37
6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-6, 6-26, 6-37, 6-61, 6-70, 7-4
6GT2 090-0A..., 3-58, 6-30, 6-95
6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-71
6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-71
6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-71
6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-63
6GT2 090-0BA10, 3-63
6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-6
6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-6
6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-26, 6-30, 6-70
6GT2 090-0HA00, 3-57
6GT2 090-0HB00, 6-94, 6-99, 6-104, 6-109, 7-9
6GT2 090-0NA00, 6-6
6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-63
6GT2 091-0FH.., 6-58
6GT2 091-0FH20, 3-67, 3-70
6GT2 091-0FH50, 3-67, 3-70
6GT2 091-0A..., 3-64, 6-37, 6-39
6GT2 091-0AH50, 3-69
6GT2 091-0AN10, 3-69
6GT2 091-0AN20, 3-69
6GT2 091-0AN50, 3-69
6GT2 091-0CH20, 3-70
6GT2 091-0CH50, 3-70
6GT2 091-0D..., 3-64, 6-24
6GT2 091-0DH50, 3-69
6GT2 091-0DN10, 3-69
6GT2 091-0DN20, 3-69
6GT2 091-0E..., 3-65, 6-60, 6-61, 6-66
6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-69
6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-69
6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-69
6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-69
6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-69
6GT2 091-1C..., 3-65
6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-70, 6-26, 6-30, 6-70
6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-70
6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-70
6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-70
6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-70
6GT2 091-2A..., 3-64
6GT2 091-2AN10, 3-69
6GT2 091-2AN50, 3-69
6GT2 091-2C..., 3-65
6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-70
6GT2 091-2D..., 3-64
6GT2 091-2DH50, 3-69
6GT2 091-2E..., 3-65
6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-69
6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-69
6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-69
6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-69
6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-13
6GT2 190-0AA00, 4-8, 4-10
6GT2 190-0AB00, 4-8, 4-10
Index-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
6GT2 300-0AA00, 4-4
6GT2 300-0BB00, 4-8
6GT2 300-0CD00, 4-12
6GT2 300-0CE00, 4-17
6GT2 301-0AA00, D-1
6GT2 301-0AB00, D-1
6GT2 301-0CA00, 5-3
6GT2 301-2BB00, 5-24, 6-79
6GT2 302-2CE00, 6-79
6GT2 302-2EE00, 6-79
6GT2 303-0AA00, 7-13
6GT2 303-1AA00, 7-13
6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-13
6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-13
6GT2 305-0AA00, 6-99
6GT2 305-0AB00, 6-104
6GT2 305-0CA00, 6-109
6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-13
6GT2 390-0AA00, 4-4, 4-6
6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-37, 6-79
6GT2 390-1AA00, 6-99, 6-104, 6-109
6GT2 390-1AB00, 3-62, 6-37, 6-79
6GT2 391-0B..., 6-37, 6-39, 6-79
6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-66, 3-70
6GT2 391-0BN20, 3-66, 3-70
6GT2 391-1AH50, 3-66, 3-70, 5-24, 6-78, 6-79
6GT2 391-1BN10, 3-67, 3-70, 6-79
6GT2 391-1BN25, 3-67, 3-70, 5-24, 6-79
6GT2 391-1DH50, 3-68, 3-70, 6-94, 6-99, 6-104,
6-109, 7-9
6GT2 398-1AF00, 5-9, D-1
6GT2 398-1CA00, 5-9, D-1
6GT2 398-1CB00, 5-9, D-1
6GT2 398-1CC00, 5-9
6GT2 398-1CD00, 5-9
6GT2 398-1CE00, 5-9
6GT2 398-1CE00-0AX0, 5-9
6GT2 491-1HH50, 3-70, 6-37, 6-39, 6-78, 6-79,
7-5
6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-59, 6-37, 6-78, 6-79, 7-5
6GT2 891-0F..., 3-67, 6-58
6GT2 891-0FH20, 3-70
6GT2 891-0FH50, 3-70
6GT2 891-0FN10, 3-70
6GT2 891-0FN20, 3-70
6GT2 891-0FN50, 3-70
6VX1 830-0EH10, 6-58
6XV1 822-5B..., 6-58
6XV1 830-3D..., 6-58
6XV1 830-7AH10, 6-58
6XV1 830-7B..., 6-58
A
Acquisition station ES 030-K
features/layout, 7-15
ordering data, 7-17
technical data, 7-18
Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-41,
6-85
Amount of data, transmitted based on MDS speed,
3-14
ASM 400
address settings, 6-10
configuration and functions, 6-4
connectors and their assignment, 6-9
function block FB 250, 6-8
ordering data, 6-6
settings on the channel module, 6-11
SIMATIC S5 configuration, 6-12
switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-10
technical data, 6-7
ASM 410
configuration in ET 100U/200U, 6-20
layout and function, 6-16
ordering data, 6-17
setting the operating mode, 6-22
slots in the PLC, 6-19
technical data, 6-18
wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-24
ASM 424
adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting,
6-41
configuration and function, 6-36
dimensions, 6-41
ordering data, 6-37
pin assignment and switches, 6-40
technical data, 6-38
Index
Index-3
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
ASM 450
configuration and function, 6-25
dimensions, 6-32
ordering data, 6-26
pin assignments, 6-33
PROFIBUS address and terminating resistor,
6-35
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-29
SLG connection method, 6-29
technical data, 6-27
ASM 452
configuration and function, 6-26
dimensions, 6-32
ordering data, 6-26
pin assignments, 6-33
PROFIBUS address and terminating resistor,
6-35
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-29
SLG connection method, 6-29
technical data, 6-27
ASM 454
adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting,
6-41
configuration and function, 6-36
dimensions, 6-41
ordering data, 6-37
pin assignment and switches, 6-40
technical data, 6-38
ASM 456
configuration, 6-45
design, 6-44
diagnosis using LEDs, 6-54
dimensions, 6-57
function, 6-42
ordering data, 6-58
setting the PROFIBUS address, 6-46
SLG connection technique, 6-52
technical data, 6-56
wiring, 6-49
ASM 470
configuration and function, 6-59
installation of the software, 6-67
ordering data, 6-61
technical data, 6-62
wiring to the SLG, 6-66
ASM 473
configuration, 6-72
configuration and function, 6-69
dimensions, 6-76
hardware configuration, 6-74
ordering data, 6-70
pin assignments, 6-75
SLG connection method, 6-74
technical data, 6-70
ASM 475
configuration and function, 6-60
installation of the software, 6-67
ordering data, 6-61
technical data, 6-62
wiring to the SLG, 6-66
ASM 724
adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting,
6-85
dimensions, 6-85
dynamic operation, 6-81
ordering data, 6-79
pin assignment and switches, 6-83
technical data, 6-80
ASM 754
adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting,
6-85
dimensions, 6-85
dynamic operation, 6-81
ordering data, 6-79
pin assignment and switches, 6-83
technical data, 6-80
B
Basic rules on EMC, 3-53
C
C-library
CCT32, 7-4
MOBY API, 7-4
Cable configuration, 3-58
Cable lengths, 3-69
Cables, shielding of, 3-51
Index
Index-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
CCT32, 7-4
Chemical resistance of the mobile data memories,
3-37
Communication
between ASM and user program, 3-8
between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS, 3-7
Concept of shielding, 3-55
Connecting cables, 3-64
Connector assignment, 3-60
D
Data structure of the MOBY E data memory with
SIM, 6-87
Documentation
Manuals, A-1
Operator control guides, A-1
Technical descriptions, A-1
E
EMC guidelines, 3-40
Equipotential bonding, 3-49
F
Field data, 3-11, 6-89
L
LEDs for MOBY, 6-75
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-75
M
MDS E600
dimensions, 4-6
field data, 4-5
metal-free space, 4-7
ordering data, 4-4
technical data, 4-4
MDS E611
dimensions, 4-9
field data, 4-9
metal-free space, 4-11
ordering data, 4-8
technical data, 4-8
MDS E623
field data, 4-13
metal-free space, 4-14
mounting, 4-15
ordering data, 4-12
technical data, 4-12
MDS E624
dimensions, 4-18
field data, 4-18
metal-free space, 4-19
ordering data, 4-17
technical data, 4-17
Metal-free area, 3-20
flush mounting of MDS in metal, 3-20
flush mounting of SLG/SLA in metal, 3-26
Metal-free space, mounting the MDS on metal,
3-20
MOBY Software, 7-2
ordering data, 7-4
MOBY STG E hand-held terminal
ordering data, 7-13
system prerequisites, 7-11
MOBY wide-range power supply
dimensions, 7-7
ordering data, 7-5
technical data, 7-5
MOBY wide-range power supply unit, connector
pin assignment 24 V output, 7-6
MOBY API, 7-4
MOBY STG E hand-held terminal
hardware, 7-12
setup and function, 7-10
technical data, 7-13
O
Ordering data, SLG connector, 3-62
R
Round cores, 5-23
Index
Index-5
MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
S
SIM 70 ANT 0
definition of distance D, 6-102
dimensions, 6-102
metal-free space, 6-103
ordering data, 6-99
technical data, 6-99
transmission window, 6-103
SIM 70 ANT 1
definition of distance D, 6-108
dimensions, 6-108
metal-free space, 6-107
ordering data, 6-104
technical data, 6-104
transmission window, 6-106
SIM 72
definition of distance D, 6-113
dimensions, 6-113
metal-free space, 6-112
ordering data, 6-109
technical data, 6-109
transmission window, 6-111
SLA 71
definition of distance D, 5-27
dimensions, 5-27
field data, 5-25
metal-free space, 5-26
ordering data, 5-24
technical data, 5-24
transmission window, 5-26
SLG 72
definition of distance D, 5-6
dimensions, 5-6
field data, 5-4
metal-free space, 5-5
ordering data, 5-3
technical data, 5-3
transmission window, 5-5
SLG 75 ANT 1
definition of distance D, 5-18
dimensions, 5-20
field data, 5-12
metal-free space, 5-15
ordering data, 5-9
technical data, 5-10
transmission window, 5-13
SLG 75 ANT 4
definition of distance D, 5-18
dimensions, 5-20
field data, 5-12
metal-free space, 5-15
ordering data, 5-9
technical data, 5-10
transmission window, 5-13
SLG 75 ANT 12
definition of distance D, 5-18
dimensions, 5-20
field data, 5-12
metal-free space, 5-15
ordering data, 5-9
technical data, 5-10
transmission window, 5-13
SLG 75 ANT 18
definition of distance D, 5-18
dimensions, 5-20
field data, 5-12
metal-free space, 5-15
ordering data, 5-9
technical data, 5-10
transmission window, 5-13
SLG 75 ANT 30
definition of distance D, 5-18
dimensions, 5-20
field data, 5-12
metal-free space, 5-15
ordering data, 5-9
technical data, 5-10
transmission window, 5-13
SLG connector, ordering data, 3-63
Split toroidal cores, 5-22
Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-59
T
Transmission window, 3-3
effects of metal, 3-28
reduction of metallic effects, 3-34
Transmit period of the MDS, 3-6
W
Wide-range connector power pack
ordering data, 7-9
technical data, 7-8
Index
Index-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618
Index
TO:
Siemens AG
A&D SE EWF MS
PO Box 2355
D-90713 Fuerth
FROM:
Your name: ______________________________
Your title: ______________________________
Your company: ______________________________
Street: _____________________________
City: ______________________________
Telephone:______________________________
Please tick your branch.
rAutomotive industry
rChemical industry
rElectrical industry
rFoodstuffs
rProcess control technology
rMechanical engineering
rPetrochemistry
rPharmaceutics industry
rPlastics processing
rPaper industry
rTextiles industry
rTransportation industry
rOther _____________
If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Remarks/Suggestions
Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation.
Please complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens.
Title of your manual:____________________________
Order number of your manual:_______________________
Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ?
2. Is it easy to find the information you need ?
3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ?
4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ?
5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ?
